A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law

Exercise – 1

Question 1.
In which direction conventional current and electronic current flow from a source of electricity ?
Answer:
Electronic current is always in opposite direction to conventional current.

  1. When both the bodies are positively charged and are in contact the body having more +ve charge is at higher potential conventional current from A to B + 100 > + 70 from higher potential to lover potential.
    ∴ Electronic current from B to A.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 1
  2. When both A and b negative charge conventional current: from higher potential (—70) to lower potential (—100) i.e. from B to A electronic current: from A to B.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 2
  3. When A has +ve charge of 100 units and B has —ve charge of 70 units Conventional Current: from A to B Higher potential to lover potential a electronic current from b to A.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 3

Question 2.
Define electric potential. State its practical unit and define it.
Answer:
Electric Potential : “Is the electrical state of a conductor which determines the direction of flow of charrge when two conductors are either in contact or joined by a metallic wire.”
Or
ELECTRIC POTENTIAL “at a point is the work done in moving unit positive charge from infinity to that point in an electric field.
S.I. unit is volt.
VOLT : “If work done in moving 1 coulomb of charge from one point to other is 1 joule, the potential-difference between two points is said to be 1 volt.”

Question 3.
Define quantity of charge. States its practical unit and define it
Answer:
Quality of charge is “The number of charges (electrons) which drift from a higher to a lower potential is called quantity of charge.”
Particle unit of charge is coulomb.
Coulomb: “Flow of 6.25 × 1018 electrons through a conductor constitute 1 coulomb.”
Or
“Charge carried by  6.25 × 1018 electrons is called 1 coulomb.”

Question 4.
Define electric current State its practical unit and define it
Answer:
Electric current: “Rate of flow of charge”. I = Q/t = ne/t
S.I. Unit → Ampere (A)
Ampere : “When a charge of 1 coulomb passes in 1 second current flowing is one ampere.”

Question 5.
State two multiples and two submultiples of the unit of electric potential and electric current
Answer:
Multiple units of :
Electric potential is

  1. ( Kv ) kilovolt = 103 V
  2. Megavolt (Mv) = 10V

Electric current :

  1. KA (kilo-ampere) = 1000 A
  2. MA (Mega-ampere) = 106

Sub multiple units of:
Electric potential:

  1. mV milli volt = 10-3 V
  2. µv = micro volt = lO-6 V

Electric current :

  1. mA = milli ampere = 10-3 A
  2. µA = micro-ampere = 10-6 A

Question 6.
What do you understand by the terms potential difference? State its practical unit
Answer:
Potential difference: “Is the amount of work done in moving a unit positive charge from one point to other.” Practical unit – volt.

Question 7.
Define
(a) open electric circuit
(b) closed electric circuit.
Answer:
(a) Open electric circuit : “An electric circuit in which low of current stops, because of an open switch is called an open_electric circuit.
(b) Closed electric circuit : “An electric circuit in which a current flows continuously, because the switch is closed is called a closed electric .
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 4

Question 8.
What do you understand by the term electric resistance? state its practical unit.
Answer:
“The obstruction offered to the flow of current by a conductor (wire) is called its RESISTANCE.”
S.l. UNIT — is 1/OHM or (Ohm)-1

Question 9.
What do you understand by the term electric conductance? State its practical unil
Answer:
“The reciprocal of resistance is called electric CONDUCTANCE”. i.e.
Conductance = 1/Resistance
S.l. Unit of Conductance Ω-1 or OHM-1

Question 10.
What is a superconductor ? Name two materials and the temperature at which they become superconductors.
Answer:
SUPER CONDUCTOR : “The substances which lose resistance when they are cooled to very low temperature (nearly absolute zero) are called super conductors, e.g. mercury at 4.12 k, LEAD. TIN, VANADIUM etc. and this phenomenon is called SUPER CONDUCTIVITY. The temperature at which they become super-conductors is called CRITICAL TEMPERATURE.

Question 11.
State the laws of resistance.
Answer:
Laws of resistance :

  1. Resistance of a conductor is directly proportional to its length R α l
  2. Resistance of a conductor is Inversely proportional to its area of cross-section R α 1/a
  3. Resistance of a conductor depend upon its nature i.e. copper has less resistance than iron.
  4. Resistance of a conductor increases with increase in temperature i.e. resistance of filament of a bulb is more when lighted as compared to when it is not lighted.

Question 12.
Define specific resistance and state its unit in CGS and SI system.
Answer:
Specific resistance: “Is the resistance of a wire of that material of unit length and unit area of cross-section.”
Unit:
In C.G.S. system → [Ω – cm] ohm – cm
In S.I. system → [Ω – m] ohm – metre.

Question 13.
Name two materials in each case whose resistance
(a) increases,
(b) remains the same and
(c) decreases with the rise in temperature.
Answer:
Two materials:

  1. Cu, iron, sp. resistance increases Tungston with increase in temp.
  2. Metallic alloys like eureka, Manganin and German silver The sp. resistance remains the same with rise in temp.
  3. Carbon and Rubber. Resistance decrease with increase in temperature.

Question 14.
Give two differences between the electric resistance and electric specific resistance of a material
Answer:
Two differences between resistance and sp. resistance.
Resistance :

  1. S.I. unit is ohm (Ω)
  2. It is measured as ratio of pot. difference at the ends of a conductor to the current flowing through the conductor.

Resistivity or sp. Resistance :
S.I. unit [Ω-m] ohm. metre. It is measured as the resistance offered by a conductor of unit length and unit area of cross-section.

Multiple choice questions

Tick ( ✓) the most appropriate option.

Question 1.
The graph between V/I for a conductor is a straight line. The slope of the graph represents :
(a) resistivity
(b) resistance
(c) electric potential
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) resistance

Question 2.
Two conductors A and B have 500 and 100 units of . negative charge when the conductors are connected by
an electric wire the conventional current flows from :
(a) A to B
(b) B to A
(c) Current does not flow
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) B to A

Question 3.
A conductor at 4.2 K is found to offer no resistance. Such a conductor is called
(a) zero conductor
(b) superconductor
(c) absolute conductor
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) superconductor

Question 4.
Which of the following is non-ohmic resistance ?
(a) Copper wire
(b) Brass wire
(c) Copper wire wound on an electromagnet
(d) Constantan wire
Answer:
(b) Brass wire

Question 5.
Which of the following an ohmic resistance ?
(a) Diode valve
(b) Filament of a bulb
(c) Carbon are light
(d) Manganin wire
Answer:
(d) Manganin wire

Question 6.
A conductor has a resistivity of 2.63 × 10-8 Ω m at 20° C. If the temperature of conductor is raised to 200°C, its resistivity will :
(a) increase
(b) decrease
(c) remain unaffected
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) increase

Question 7.
Amongst the following substance, the resistance will decrease with the increase in temperature in case of:
(a) copper
(b) carbon
(c) brass
(d) nichrome
Answer:
(b) carbon

Numericals on Specific Resistance

Practice Problems : 1
Question 1.
A wire of resistance 4.5 Ω and length 150 cm, has an area of cross-section of 0.04 cm-2. Calculate sp. resistance of the wire.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 5

Question 2.
A wire of length 40 cm and area of cross-section 0.1 mm2 has a resistance of 0.8 fl Calculate sp. resistance of the wire.
Answer:
I = 40 cm, area of cross-section a = 0.1 m m2 = 0.1/100 c m2 R = 0.8 Ω
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 6

Practice Problems : 2

Question 1.
Resistance of a conductor of length 75 cm is 3.25 Ω. Calculate the length of a similar conductor, whose resistance is 13.25Ω.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 7

Question 2.
A conductor of length 85 cm has a resistance of 3.750. Calculate the resistance of a similar conductor of length 540 cm.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 8

Practice Problems : 3

Question 1.
A resistance wire made from German silver has a resistance of 4.250. Calculate the resistance of another wire, made from same material, such that its length increases by 4 times and area of cross-section decreases by three times.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 9

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 10

Question 2.
A nichrome wire of length l and area of cross-section a/ 4 has a resistance R. Another nichrome wire of length 31 and area of cross-section a/2 has a resistance of R1 Find the ratio of R, : R.
Answer:
As both the wire are made of same material, have same sp. resistance
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 11

Exercise – 2

Question 1.
(a) Define series circuit.
Answer:
(a) Series circuit: “Resistances are said to be connected in series if same current flows through them and the resistance are connected end to end.
(b) State three characteristics of a series circuit Ans. Characteristics of series circuit:
Answer:

  1. Same current flows through each resistance.
  2. V = V1 + V2 + V3 …. i.e. total potential drop is the sum of individual resistances.
  3. When we want higher resistance, connect them in series. (Resistance is more than individual resistances).

Question 2.
(a) Define parallel circuit.
Answer:
Parallel circuit : “Resistances are said to be connected in parallel if one end of each is connected at a common terminal and other end of each at other common terminal and they have a common pot. difference.”
(b) State three characteristics of a parallel circuit.
Answer:
Characteristics of parallel circuit:

  1. Pot. difference of each resistance is same.
  2. Current divides [I = I1 + I2 + I3…]
  3. I/R = I/R1 + I/R2 + I/R3 reciprocal of total resistance is the sum of reciprocals of individual resistances.
  4. Total resistance is less than the least of individual resistances.

Question 3.
(a) Stale Ohm’s law.
Answer:
Ohm’s Law : “Physical conditions like temp. remaining the same potential across the ends of a conductor is directly proportional to the current flowing”.

(b) What are the limitations of 0hm‘s law?
Answer:
Ohms’Law is obeyed only when temperature remains constant.

Question 4.
How will you verify Ohm’s law by voltmeter, ammeter method?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 12

Verification of Ohm’s Law: Use the circuit as shown taking case the +ve of voltmeter and +ve of Ammeter should be connected to the +ve of battery and voltmeter in parallel key is closed and Rheostat is set to get the minimum reading in Ammeter and voltmeter. The rheostat is then gradually moved
and each time value of A and V are noted. The ratio of V/I is always found constant. This verified ohm’s law.

Question 5.
How will you verify Ohm’s law by potentiometer method?
Answer:
Potentiometer method to verify

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 13

Connect the potentiometer as shown, close the key and record the potential difference by pressing the jockey at 10 cm intervals of length of the potentiometer wire. Repeat the experiment for six different lengths of potentiometer wire and record the corresponding pot. differences.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 14

Find the ratio between potential difference and length. It is found.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 15
V/l = constant (I) (where I is current and the current in series circuit is constant quantity)
But l α R {By law of resistance}
V/R = I or I = V/R
Hence ohm’s law is verified.

Question 6.
What are ohmic resistances ? Given two examples.
Answer:
Ohmic resistances : “Conductors which obey ohm’s law are called ohmic resistances.”
Two examples : Vanadium, all pure metals like Cu, Al, etc.

Question 7.
What are non-ohmic resistances ? Give two examples.
Answer:
Non-ohmic resistances: “The resistances which do not obey ohm’s law are called non-ohmic resistances.”
Two examples : Diode valve, triode valve, transistors, filament of a bulb.

Question 8.
Derive an expression for three resistances connected in series.
Answer:
EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE OF RESISTORS
(i) in PARALLEL :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 16

Let three resistors are connect in such away that one end of each R1, R2, R3 is connected at a common terminal (X) and the other end of each at common terminal (Y) through a battery. So that potential difference of each resistor is V and current I at X divides itself and I1, I2 and I3 flows through R,, R, and R3 respectively and again combine at y and current I flows further.
I = I1 + I2 + I3 …(i) we know that
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 18
EQUIVALENT or RESULTANT resistance of parallel conductors
The reciprocal of EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE is equal to the sum of the reciprocals of individual resistors.
EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE OF RESISTORS
In (ii)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 17

Let three resistors R1, R2, and R3, be connected in series i.e. resistors are joined one after the other as shown and same current I passes through each and each resistors has potential difference say V,, V, and V3 so that total p.d. between A and D terminals is V
V = V1 + V2 + V3 …(i) V = IR
IR = I R1 + IR2 + IR3 V1 = IR1
IR = I[R1 + R2 + R3] V2 = IR2
V3 = IR3 put in (i)
R = R1 + R2 + R3
i. e. EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE of resistors in series is the sum of their individual resistance.

Question 9.
Derive an expression for three resistances connected in parallel.
Answer:
To derive relation for resultant resistance of three resistances in parallel, consider three resistances
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 19

  1. r1, r2, r3 One end of each is connected to common terminal X and other end of each at common terminaly.
  2. Here current I divides into I1, I2, I3, flowing through r1, r2, r3 and potential difference is v for all resistances.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 20
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 21

Question 10.
What do you understand by the term internal resistance of a cell ?
Answer:
INTERNAL RESISTANCE OF A CELL :
“The resistance offered by the electrolyte inside the cell to the flow of current is called the internal resistance of cell.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 22

Question 11.
State the factors on which internal resistance of a cell depends.
Answer:
Factors effecting the internal resistance of a cell :

  1. Surface area of electrodes larger surface area, lesser is the internal resistance.
  2. Distance between electrodes : more the distance, more is the internal resistance.
  3. Temp, of electrolyte r α 1/T
  4. Higher the concentration of electrolyte greater is internal resistance.

Question 12.
What is the difference between emf and terminal voltage of a cell ?
Answer:
Difference between e.m.f. and terminal voltage :
Terminal voltage : When current is drawn from a cell i.e. the cell is in a closed circuit, the potential differences between the electrodes (terminals) of a cell is called terminal voltage,
e.m.f. : “when no current is drawn from a cell i.e. when the cell is in open circuit, the pot. difference between the terminals of the cell is called electromotive force, (e.m.f.).

Multiple choice questions

Tick ( ✓ ) the most appropriate option.

Question 1.
In a series circuit:
(a) p.d. across all resistors is same
(b) current flowing through all resistors is same
(c) The combined resistance of all resistors is less than individual resistors.
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) current flowing through all resistors is same

Question 2.
In a parallel circuit:
(a) p.d. across all resistors is same
(b) current flowing through all resistors is same
(c) the equivalent resistance of all resistors is more than any of the individual resistors
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(a) p.d. across all resistors is same

Question 3.
Two resistors of 2 Ω. each are connected in a parallel. The equivalent resistance is :
(a) less than 2 Ω but more than 1Ω
(b) one ohm
(c) four ohm
(d) between 4 Ω and 2 Ω
Answer:
(b) one ohm

Question 4.
A new cell is marked 1.5 V. When connected to an external resistance, the voltmeter connected to its terminals reads 1.2 V. The drop in potential across the terminals of the cell is due to the :
(a) internal resistance of cell
(b) external resistance .
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d)none of these
Answer:
(a) internal resistance of cell

Question 5.
A potentiometer is connected to a cell through switch in series. To one end of the potentiometer is attached a voltmeter with the help of connecting wire and a jockey. When the jockey is moved over the potentiometer wire from zero end to 100 cm the reading shown by voltmeter is likely to :
(a) decrease
(b) increase
(c) does not change
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) increase

Question 6.
When the current is drawn from a cell in a closed circuit, the potential difference between the terminals of cell is called :
(a) e.m.f.
(b) p.d.
(c) terminal voltage
(d) both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(c) terminal voltage

Numerical Problems on Resistance

Practice Problems : 1

Question 1.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 23
Calculate the equivalent resistance.

  1. between points A and B
  2. between points A and C.

Answer:
Resistance 6Ω, 3Ω and 2Ω are in parallel between A and B

  1. Equivalent resistance between AB is R1  ∴ R1 = 1Ω
    Now combination R1 and 1Ω of BC are in series.
  2. Now between points A and C R = R1 + 1 = 1 + 1 = 2Ω

Question 2.
In figure, calculate equivalent resistance between points

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 25

(i) A and B
(ii) B and C
(iii) A and C.

Answer:
(i) Equivalent resistance between AB 4Ω and 12 Ω are in parallel
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 24
(iii) Between A and CD
Now R1 and Rand in series
Equivalent Resistance between A and C
1 R = R1 + R2 = 3 + 4 = 7Ω

Practice Problems : 2

Question 1.
Calculate the equivalent resistance between points

(i) B and E
(ii) A and F.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 26
Answer:
(i) Equivalent Resistance between BE, (1Ω, 2Ω, 3Ω are in series) isR1
R1 = 1 + 2 + 3 = 6Ω
R1 is in parallel to R2 = 3Ω
their resultant R.3
1/r3 = 1/r1 +1/r2 = 1/6 + 1/3 = 1+2/6 = 1/6 Between BE
:.R= 2Ω
(ii) Equivalent resistance between A and F
i.e. R4, R2, Rs are in series
3Ω, 2Ω and 3Ω are in series
R= 3 + 2 + 3 = 812

Question 2.
Calculate the equivalent resistance of circuit diagram shown in Fig. below.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 27
Resistances A and B are in series
R= 4 + 8 = 12Ω
Resistance C and D are in series
R2 = 1.5 + 4.5 = 6Ω
Now R1, E and R2 are in parallel
:. Equivalent resistance between F and G
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 28

Practice Problems : 3

Question 1.
Equivalent resistance of circuit diagram is 6Ω. Calculate the value of x.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 29

Question 2.
Equivalent resistance of circuit diagram is 5Ω. Calculate the value of x.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 30
Answer:
Since Equivalent resistance of 4Ω and parallel combination is 5Ω and 4Ω and parallel combination are in series.
Resistance of parallel combination is = 5 – 4= lΩ
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 31

Numerical Problems on Ohm’s Law

Practice Problems : 1

Question 1.
A current of 0.2 A flows through a conductor of resistance 4.50. Calculate p.d. at the ends of conductor.
Answer:
Here I = 0.2 A, R = 4.5Ω
p.d. at the ends of conductor V = IR
V = 0.2 × 4.5 = 0.9 V

Question 2.
A bulb of resistance 4000 is connected to 200 V mains. Calculate the magnitude of current.
Answer:
R = 400Ω, V = 200 V
I = V/R 200/400 = 0.5 A

Question 3.
An electric heater draws a current of 5 A, when connected to 220 V mains. Calculate the resistance of its filament.
Answer:
I = 5 A, V = 220 V, R = ?
R = v/I = 220/5 = 44Ω

Practice Problems : 2

Question 1.
Four resistors of resistance 0.5 Ω, 1.5Ω, 4Ω and 6Ω are connected in series to a battery of e.m.f. 6 V and negligible internal resistance. Calculate :

  1. current drawn from the cell
  2. p.d. at the ends of each resistor.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 32

Question 2.
Figure shows a circuit diagram having a battery of 24 V and negligible internal resistance. Calculate :

  1. reading of the ammeter,
  2. reading of V1, V2 and V3.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 33

Answer:
As 6Ω and 3Ω are in parallel
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 34

Practice Problems : 3

Question 1.
Three resistors of 6Ω, 2Ω and x are connected in series to a cell of e.m.f 3/2 V, when the current registered in circuit is 1/6 A. Draw the circuit diagram and calculate value of x
Answer:
Circuit diagram:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 35

Question 2.
Carefully study the circuit diagram in figure and calculate the value of resistor x.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 36
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 37A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 38

Practice Problems : 4

Question 1.
Three resistors of 4Ω, 6Ω. and 12Ω are connected in parallel The combination of these resistors is connected in series to a resistance of 2Ω and then to a battery of e.m.f 6 V and negligible internal resistance.
(a) Draw the circuit diagram
(b) Calculate the current in main circuit
(c) Calculate the current in each of the resistors in parallel
Answer:
(a) Circuit diagram
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 39

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 40

Question 2.
Study the circuit diagram in figure carefully and calculate:
(a) current in main circuit
(b) current in each of the resistors in parallel circuit.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 41
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 42
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 43

Practice Problems : 5

Question 1.
Figure shows a circuit diagram containing 12 cells, each of e.m.f 1.5 V and intenal resistance 0.25Ω Calculate:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 44
(a) Total internal resistance
(b) Total e.m.f.
(c) Total external resistance
(d) Reading shown by the ammeter
(e) Current in 12Ω and 8Ω resistors
(f) p.d. across 2.2 resistor
(g) Drop in potential across the terminals of the cell
Answer:
Number cells in series = n – 12
(a) Total internal resistance of 12 cells = n r = 12 × 0.25 = 3Ω
(b) Total e.m.f. = 12> <1.5 = 18 v
(c) Total external resistance : 4 + 8 = 12 Ω in series
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 45
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 46
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 47

Question 2.
Four cells, each of e.m.f 2 V and internal resistance 0.2 Ω each are connected in series to form a battery. This battery is connected to an ammeter, a resistance 1.2 and then to a set of resistance of 4 Ω, 6 Ω and 12 Ω in parallel to complete the overall circuit in series.
(a) Draw circuit diagram of arangment.
(b) Calculate total internal resistance
(c) Total e.m.f.
(d) Current recorded by ammeter.
(e) Current flowing through 6 wire in parallel.
(f) Drop in potential across the terminals of the battery.
Answer:
(a) Circuit diagram :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 48
(b) Total internal resistance r = 4 × 0.2 = 0.8 Ω
(c) Total e.m.f. = 4 × 2 = 8 v
(d) Current recorded by ammeter ?
R1 across CD 1/R1 = 1/4 + 1/6 + 1/12 = R1 = 2 Ω
Total resistance (0.8 + 1.2 + 2) = 4 Ω
I = v/R = 8/4 = 2a
(e) Vacross CD = I R1= 2 × 2 = 4 V
Current through 6 Ω = v/R = 4/6 = 0.67 A
(f) droop in potential across the terminals of the battery E – V = Ir = 2 × 0.8 = 1.6 V

Practice Problems : 6

Question 1.
Two cells, each of e.m.f 1.5 V and internal resistance 1 Ω are connected in parallel, to form a battery. The battery is connected to an externari resistance of 0.5 Ω and two resistances of 3 Ω and 1.5 Ω in parallel.
(a) Draw the circuit diagram.
(b) Calculate the current in main circuit.
(c) Calculate the current in 1.5 Ω resistor.
(d) Calculate the drop in potential across the terminal of the battery.
Answer:
(a) Circuit diagram
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 49
(b) Current in the main circuit
Total internal resistance of two parallel cells I/R1 = 1 + 1
R = 1/2 = O.5 Ω
Effective resistance between PQ = 1/R2 = 1/3 + 2/3
R2 = 1 Ω
Total resistance of circuit R = R1 + R2+ external resistance
R= O.5 + I + O.5 = 2Ω, V= 1.5 V
current in main circuit
I = V/R = 1.5/2 = O.75 A
(c) Current in 1 .5 Ω resistor
p.d. between PQ = IR2
V1 = 0.75 × 1
V1 = 0.75 V
V1 = 0.75
I1= V1/1.5 = 0.75/1.5 = O.5 A
(d) Drop in potential across the terminals of battery E – V = Ir = 0.75 × 0.5 = 0.375 V

Question 2.
Four cells, each of e.m.f. 1.5 V and internal resistance 2 Ω. each are connected in parallel to form a battery. The battery is connected to an external resistance of 0.5 Ω. and three resistances of 12 Ω, 6 Ω and 4 Ω. in parallel.

  1. Draw the circuit diagram.
  2. Calculate current in main circuit
  3. Calculate current in 4 D resistor.
  4. Calculate drop in potential across the terminals of  battery.

Answer:
1.circuit diagram is drawn
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 50
4. Drop in potential across the terminals of battery
E – V = 1r
= 0.5 × 0.5 = 0.25 V

Practice Problems : 7

Question 1.
A cell of e.m.f 1.5 V, records a p.d. of 1.35 V, when connected lo an external resistance R, such that current flowing through circuit is 0.75 A. Calculate the value of R and internal resistance of cell
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 51

Question 2.
In figure a current of 1 A flows through the circuit, when p.d. recorded at the ends of parallel resistors is 1 volt. Calculate the value of R and r.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 52
Answer: For parallel resistors
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 53
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 54

Practice Problems : 8

Question 1.
A cell of e.m.f 1.8 V is connected to an external resistance of 2 Ω, when p.d. recorded at the ends of resistance is 1.6 V. Calculate the internal resistance of the cell.
Answer:
I = V/R
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 55

Question 2.
Study ttitel circuit diagram in Fig. 8.44, and hence, calculate the internal resistance of cel                                      A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 56

Practice Problems 9

Question 1.
A cell, when connected to an external resistance of 4.5 Ω shows a p.d of 1.35 V. If 4.5 Ω resistance is replaced by 2.5Ω resistance the p.d drops to 1.25 V. Calculate:
(a) em.f.,
(b) internal resistance of the cell
Answer:
Let ‘E’ be the e.m.f and ‘r’ the internal resistance
Case(l) r = R [e-v]/v
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 57

Question 2.
Study the figures carefully and hence calculate the value of E and r.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 58
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 59

Questions from ICSE Examination Papers

2003

Question 1.
Study the diagram carefully and calculate :
(a) the equivalent resistance between P and Q.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 60
(b) the reading of the ammeter.
(e) the electrical power between P and Q.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 61

2004

Question 2.
Mention two factors which determine the internal resistance of a cell.
Answer:
The internal resistance of a cell depends on

  1. Surface area of electrodes and
  2. distance between the electrodes.

2005

Question 3.
Four resistances of 2.0Ω each are joined end to end to form a square A B C D. Calculate the equivalent resistance of the combination between any two adjacent corners.
Answer:
Resistors R1, R2 and R3 are in series, therefore their equivalent resistance is Rs = R1 + R2 + R3= 2 + 2 + 2 = 6 ohm.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 62
Now Rs and R4 are in parallel, therefore equivalent resistance of the combination between two adjacent corners is
1/Rp = 1/Rs + 1/R4 = 1/6 + 1/2 = 2/3
Therefore Rp = 1.5 ohm.

Question 4.
The figure shows three ammeters A, B and C. The ammeter B reads O. 5 A. If all the ammeters have negligible resistance calculate: Calculate:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 63

  1. the readings in the ammeters A and C
  2. the total resistance of the circuit
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 64

2006

Question 5.
A wire of uniform thickness with a resistance of 27 Ω is cut into three equal pieces and they are joined in parallel. Find the resistance of Ike parallel combination.
Answer:
A wire is cut into 3 peices
Also Resistance of wire is proportional to length
Resistance ∝ l
Let length of wire =3l = 27Ω
Resistance of each piece, l = 27/3 = 9 Ω
When connected in parallel Resultant resistance of combination
R is 1/R = 1/9 + 1/9 + 1/9 = 3/9 = 1/3
∴R= 3Ω

Question 6.
Mention two factors on which the resistance of a wire depends.
Answer:
Two factors are

  1. length of wire R ∝ ¡
  2. Area of cross-section of wire

R ∝ 1/a

Question 7.
In the figure below, the ammeter A reads 0.3 A. Calculate :-
(a) the total resistance of the circuit.
(b) the value of R.
(c) the current flowing through R.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 65

2007

Question 8.
The V-I graph for a series combination and for a parallel combination of two resistors is as shown in the figure below:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 66
Which of the two, A or B, represents the parallel combination? Give a reason for you answer.
Answer:
Slop of  V-I graph gives us the resistance of the resistor. Slope of A is less, therefore, combination A has less resistance as compared to B. Further, since the net resistance decreases in parallel combination, therefore, A represent the parallel combination.

Question 9.
Calculate the value of the resistance which must be connected to a 15 Ω resistance to provide an effective resistance of 6 Ω.
Answer:
As the effective resistance is 6 Ω less than 15 Ω
∴ Resistance R must be connected in parallel with 15 Ω
1/15 + 1/R = 1/6 = 1/R = 1/6 – 1/15 = 5—2/30 = 1/10
∴R=10Ω

Question 10.
A cell of e.m.f. 1.5 V and internal resistance 1.0Ω is connected to two resistors of 4.0Ω and 20.0 Ω in series as shown in the figure:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 67

  1. current in the circuit.
  2. potential difference across the 4.0 ohm resistor.
  3. voltage drop when the current is flowing.
  4. potential difference across the cell.

Answer:
Here e.m.f., E = 1.5 V
Internal resistance 1.0 Ω
All the resistances are connected in series
The total circuit resistance, R= 1 + 4 + 20 = 25Ω
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 68

The current,i = E/R =1.5/25 = O.06 A
Potential difference across 4 Ω resistance = r × i = 4 × 0.06 = 0.24 V
Voltage drop across the cell = 0.06 × 1
= 0.06 V
Potential difference across the cell = 1.5— 0.06
= 1.44 V

2008

Question 11.

  1. Sketch a graph to show the change in potential difference across the ends of an ohmic resistor and the current flowing in it Label the axis of your graph.
  2. What does the slope of the graph represent?

Answer:
(i)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 69

Question 12.
Three resistors of 6.0 Ω 2.0 Ω and 4.0 Ω respectively are joined together as shown in the figure. The resistors are connected to an ammeter and to a cell of e.m.f. 6.0 V.
Calculate:
(i) tile effective resistance of the circuit.
(ii) the current drawn from the cell
Answer:

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 70

2009

Question 13.
The equivalent resistance of the following circuit diagram is 4Ω Calculate the value of x.
Answer:
(i) Equivalent resistance = 4Ω , 5Ω , × Ω are in series
∴ R1 (5 + x)Ω
8Ω and 4Ω are in series
R2 = 8 + 4 = 12Ω
R1 and R2 are in parallel
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 71
3 (5 +x) 5 + x + 12
15 + 3 x = x+ 17
3 x – x = 17-15 = 2
2 x = 2
x = 2/2 = 1Ω

Question 14.

  1. Stale Ohm’s Law.
  2. Diagrammatically illustrate how you would connect a key, a battery, a voltmeter, an ammeter, an unknown resistance R and a rheostat so that it can be used to verify the above law ?

Answer:

  1. Ohm’s law states that current flowing in a conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference across its ends provided the physical conditions remains constant.
    I ∝ V or V = IR
    Verification of Ohm’s Law: Use the circuit as shown taking case the +ve of voltmeter and +ve of Ammeter should be connected to the +ve of battery and voltmeter in parallel key is closed and Rheostat is set to get the minimum reading in Ammeter and voltmeter. The rheostat is then gradually moved
    and each time value of A and V are noted. The ratio of v/I is always found constant. This verified ohm’s law.

2010

Question 15.
Six resistances are connected together as shown in the figure. Calculate the equivalent resistance between the points A and B.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 72
Answer:
Clearly, the resistance of 2Ω, 3Ω and 5Ω are in series. Total resistance is 2Ω + 3Ω + 5Ω = 10Ω and the circuit reduces to as shown. Now, 10Ω and 10Ω are in parallel, there combined resistance R’ is:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 73

Question 16.
(a)

  1. A substance has nearly zero resistance at a temperature of 1 K. What is such a substance called ?
  2. State any two factors which affect the resistance of a metallic wire.

(b) Five resistors of different resistances are connected together as shown in the figure. A 12 V battery is connected to the arrangement. Calculate :

  1. the total resistance in the circuit.
  2. the total current flowing in the circuit.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 74

Answer:
(a)

  1. Superconductor
  2. The resistance of a metallic wire is affected by
    (a) Its area of cross-section. Ra%
    (b) Length of conductor R ∝ 1/a

(b) To solve the above Question, we have to first find the total resistance of the circuit.

  1. Here we find that R1 and R2 are in parallel and their
    combined resistance R’ is given by R’= 10 × 40/10+40 = 8Ω
    Also, the resistances of 30Ω, 20Ω and 60Ω are in parallel and their combined resistance R” is given by
    1/R” = 1/30 + 1/20 + 1/60
    = 2 + 3 + 1/60 = 6/60
    R” = 60/6 = 10Ω
    Now, R’ and R” are in series and their combined resistance R is given by .
    R = R’ + R” = 8Ω + 10Ω = 18Ω
    .’. Total resistance in the circuit = 18Ω
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 75

Question 17.
(a) Calculate the equivalent resistance between the points A and B from as shown in fig.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 76
(b)

  1. Draw a graph of Potential difference (V) versus Current (I) for an ohmic resistor.
  2. How can you find the resistance of the resistor from this graph ?
  3. What is a non-ohmic resistance ?

(c) Three resistors are connected to a 12 V battery as shown in the figure given below :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 77

  1. What is the current through the 8 Q resistor ?
  2. What is the potential difference across parallel combination of 6 Q and 12 Q ?
  3. What is the current through the 6 Q resistor ?

Answer:
(a)

  1. 2 + 3 = 5Ω are in series
    6 +- 4 = 10Ω are in series
    5, 30, 10Ω are connected in parallel
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 78

(b)

  1. V – 1 for ohmic resistor
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 79
  2. Resistance can be found by finding the reading of V corresponding to I from graph.
    R = V/I
  3. Non-Ohmic Resistance : “The resistors which do not obey the Ohm’s Law are called non-ohmic resistors.”
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 80
    r2, r3 are in parallel

1/Rp = 1/12 +1/6 = 3/12 = 1/4
Rp = 4
r1 and Rp are in series
:. R = r1 + r = 8 + 4 = 12Ω

  1. I = v/R = 12/12 = I A
  2. P.D across parallel combination AB
    V = I Rp
    I × 4 = 4 V
  3. Current through 6Ω
    I = v/r3 = 4/6 = 0.666
    I = 0.67 A

2012

Question 18.
(a) Calculate the equivalent resistance between P and Q in the following diagram:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 81
(b) A cell is sending current in an external circuit. How does the terminal voltage compare with the e.m.f of the cell?
(c) Three resistors are connected to a 6 V battery as shown in the figure in 8.59.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 82
Calculate:

  1. the equivalent resistance of the circuit.
  2. total current in the circuit.
  3. potential difference across the 7.2 c resistor.

Answer:
(a)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 83

  1. r1, r2 are in series
    Rs = 10 + 10 = 20 Ω
    Rs and r3 are in parallel
    1/Rp between A and B = 1/20+ 1/5 = 5/20= 1/4
    ∴ Rp = 4
    Now r4, Rp and r5 are in series
    ∴ R = 3 + 4 + 3 = 10Ω
    (b) When cell is sending current in an external circuit i.e. current is drawn from the cell, its TERMINAL VOLTAGE ‘V’ is less than its e.m.f. (E) by an amount equal to the voltage drop inside the cell.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 84

2013

Question 19.
(a) Calculate the equivalent resistance between the points A and B for the following combination of resistors :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 85
(b)

  1. State Ohm’s law.
  2. A metal wire of resistance 6Ω is stretched so that its length is increased lo twice the original length. Calculate Ike new resistance.

(c) The figure shows a circuit when the circuit is switched on, the ammeter reads 0.5 A. 6.0 V

  1. Calculate the value of the unknown resistor R.
  2. Calculate the charge passing through the 3Ω resistor in 120 s.
  3. Calculate the power dissipated in the 3Ω resistor.

Answer:
( a) Resistance of three 4Ω resistors in series = 4 × 3 = 12Ω Resistance of three 2Ω resistors in series = 2 × 3 = 6Ω
∴ Equivalent resistance of 12Ω, 6Ω and 4Ω in parallel.
1/Rp = 1/12 + 1/6 + 1/4 = 1 + 2 + 3/12 = 1/2 ⇒ Rp = 2 Ω
Equivalent resistance of 5Ω, 2Ω and 6Ω in series.
R = (5 + 2 + 6) 0 = 13Ω
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 86
(b)

  1. Ohm’s Law : It states, all physical conditions of a conductor remaining same, the current flowing through it is directly proportional to the potential difference at its ends.
  2. Let the original length be (l) and area of cross-section (a), such that its resistance is 6Ω
    Applying, R = K 1/a ⇒6 = kl/a …(i)
    When the length 2 l, its area of cross-section becomes a/2. If
    R ¡s the new resistance of conductor then :
    R = k 2 l/a/2 = 4 k l/a …..(ii)
    Dividing (ii) by (i) R/6 = 4 R= 24 Ω

(c)

  1. I = v/R 0.5 = 6/R +3
    0.5 R + 1.5 = 6 ⇒ 0.5 R = 4.5 ⇒ R = 9 Ω
  2. Charge Q = I x t = 0.5 x 120 = 60 Coulombs
  3. Power dissipated, P = I x V = 0.5 x 6 = 3 Watt.

2014

Question 20.
Find the equivalent resistance between points A and B in the following figure.

Answer:

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 87

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 88

Question 21.
(a) Two resistors of 4 Ω and 6 Ω are connected in parallel to a cell to draw a current of 0.5 A from the cell.

  1. Draw a labelled circuit diagram showing the above arrangement.
  2. Calculate the current in each resistor.

(b)

  1. What is an Ohmic resistance ?
  2. Two copper wires are of the same length, but one is thicker than the other.
    (i) Which wire will have more resistance?
    (ii) Which wire will have more specific resistance?

 

Answer:
(a)

  1. I = V/R V = I R
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 89
  2. Let current through 4 Ω resistance is I then current through 6Ω resistance is (0.5 — 1)
    … 1 × 4 = (0.5-1) × 6
    4 I = 3 – 61
    4 I + 6 I= 3
    10I = 3
    1 = 0.3 A
    ∴ Current through 4 Ω resistance = 0.3 A
    and current through 6 Ω resistance = 0.5 – 0.3 = 0.2 A

(b)

  1. Ohmic Resistors : The resistors which obey Ohm’s law are called the Ohmic resistors or linear resistances. For such resistors, a graph plotted for the potential difference V against current I is a straight line.
  2. (i) Thin wire will have more resistance.
    (ii) Specific resistance of both wire is same.

2015
Question 22.
(a) What happens to the resistivity of semi-conductor with the increase in temperature?
(b) Fig. the equialent resistance between point A and B.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 90
Answer:
(a) The resistivity of a semiconductor decreases with increase in temperature.
(b) Let RP be the equivalent resistance of the resistors 12Ω, 6 Ω and 4 Ω connected in parallel. Hence, we have
I/Rp = 1/12 + 1/6 + 1/4 = 1 + 2 + 3/12 = 1/2
Rp = 2 Ω
Therefore, the equivalent resistance of the circuit is 2
2 Ω + Rp + 5 Ω = 2 Ω + 5 Ω = 9 Ω
Thus, the equivalent resistance between points A and B is 9 Ω

Question 23.
(a) The relationship between the potential difference and the current iii a conductor is stated in the form of a law.

  1. Name the law.
  2. What does the slope of V-I graph for a conductor represent?
  3. Name the material used for making the connecting wire.

(b) A cell of Emf 2 V and internal resistance 1.2 Ω is connected with an ammeter of resistance 0.8 Ω and two resistors of 4.5 Ω and 9 Ω as shown in the diagram below:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 91

  1. What would be the reading on the Ammeter?
  2. What is the potential difference across the terminals of the cell?

Answer:
(a)

  1. The relationship between the potential difference and the current in a conductor is given by Ohm’s law.
  2. The slope of the V—I graph gives the resistance of the conductor.
    Slope R = v/I = R
    The material used for making connecting wires is copper.

(b) Given that =2 V, r = I.2 Ω , RA = O.8 Ω ,R1 = 4.5 Ω , R2=9 Ω

  1. We know that for the circuit
    = IR total
    Now, the total resistance of the circuit is
    R total = r + RA + Rp
    1/Rp = 1/4.5 + 1/9 = 3/9
    Rp = 3 Ω
    R total = 1.2 +0.8 +3 = 5 Ω
    Hence, the current through the ammeter is
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 92
    I = v/R total = 2/5 = 0.4 AB

⇒ 0.48 = 2 – V-I
V= 2 – 4.8 – 1.52 V
:. Potential difference Vcell 1.52 V

2016
Question 24.
(a) The V-I graph for a series combination and for a parallel combination of two resistors is shown in the figure below. Which of the two A or B. represents the parallel combination? Give reasons for your answer.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 93
(b) A music system draws a current of 400 m A when connected to a 12 V battery.

  1. What is the resistance of the music system?
  2. The music system f left playing for several hours and finally the battery voltage drops and the music system stops playing when current drops to 320 m A. At what voltage the music
    system stops playing?

(c) A battery of emf 12 V and internal resistance 2Ω is connected with two resistors A and B of resistance 4 Ω and 6 Ω respectively joined in series.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Circuits, Resistance & Ohm’s Law 94
Find:

  1. Current in circuit
  2. The terminal voltage of the cell
  3. P.D. across 6 Ω resistor.
  4. Electrical energy spent per minute in 4 Ω resistor.

Answer:
(a) A represents Parallel Combination
Reason : More current flows in parallel combination as compared to series combination.
(b)

  1. (i) Given : I = 400 m A = 400 × 10-3 A
    V=12 V
    V=IR
    R = v/1 = 12 v/400 × 10-3 A
    R- 400× 10-3 A
    R = 30Ω
  2. Current drops to I = 320 m A = 320 × 10-3 A
    The music stops playing at
    V = IR
    V = 320 × 10-3 × 30
    V = 9.6 V

(C) Given, Emf (E) = 12 V; r1 = 2Ω ; RA = 4Ω ; RB = 6Ω

  1. The current in the circuit is
    1= E/Rtotal = E/R1 + RA + RB
    I = 12/2 + 4 + 6 = IA
  2. The terminal voltage of the cell is
    Terminal Voltage = Emf- Ir,
    Terminal Voltage= 12 – (1 × 2) = 12 – 2 = 10 V
  3. The potential difference across the 6 Ω resistor is
    VB = IRB
    ∴ VB = 1 x 6 = 6 V
  4. The electrical energy spent per minute (= 60 s) is
    E = I2Rt
    E= 12 × 4 × 60 = 240 J

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits

These Solutions are part of A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions. Here we have given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits

Exercise – 1

Question 1.
(a) What do you understand by the term electric work ?
Answer:
Electric work : “Electric work is said to be done when an electric charge flows through a conductor, at some potential difference.”
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 10

(b) State and define SI unit of electric work.
Answer:
S.I. unit of electric work → Joule (J)
1J = 1 volt × 1 coulomb
1 Joule : “Is the amount of work done when a charge of one coulomb flows through a conductor at a pot. diff. of 1 volt.”

(c) Name two bigger units of electric work. How are they related to SI unit ?
Answer:
Two bigger units of electric work :

  1. Kilo – Joule (kJ) = 103 J
  2. Mega-joule (Mj) = 106 J

Question 2.
Derive an expression for electric work connecting :

(a) Current, resistance and time
(b) Current, potential difference and time.
(c) Potential difference, resistance and time.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 11

Question 3.
State three factors which determine the quantity of heat produced in a conductor.
Answer:
Three factors which determine heat produced in a conductor :
Heat produced = Energy Work done
W=H=I2Rt
∴ Three factors are I — current
R — Resistance of conductor
t — time for which current flows.

Question 4.

(a) What do you understand by the term electric power ?
(b) State SI unit of electric power and define it
(c) Name two bigger units of electric power and their relation with SI unit.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 12

Question 5.
Derive an expression for electric power connecting :

(a) Current and resistance.
(b) Current and potential difference.
(c) Potential difference and resistance.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 12.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 13

Question 6.

(a) What do you understand by term electric energy ?
(b) Name and define the smallest commercial unit of electric energy.
(c) Name and define the standard commercial unit of electric energy.

Answer:
(a) Electric energy : E = P × t = VIt
“Electric energy is the product of power and time.” i.e. electric energy consumed by an electrical appliance is produced of ‘power rating’ and ‘time’ for which it is used.
(b) Unit of electric energy → Joule (J)
S.I. unit of electric work → Joule (J)
1J = 1 volt × 1 coulomb
1 Joule : “Is the amount of work done when a charge of one coulomb flows through a conductor at a pot. diff. of 1 volt.”
(c) Standard Commercial unit of Electric Energy : Kilo-watt-Hour 1 kwH : “Is the amount of electrical energy consumed when an electrical appliance having a power rating of 1 kilowatt is used for 1 hour.”

Question 7.
With respect to electricity, define :

  1. watt hour
  2. watt
  3. kilowatt
  4. kilowatt hour. Amongst the above units, which are the units of : (i) electric energy (ii) electric power.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 13.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 14

Question 8.
How many joules of energy is equal to one kilowatt hour?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 14.1

Question 9.
Distinguish between kilo-watt and kilowatt hour.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 14.2

Question 10.
How many kilowatt is equal to one hour power ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 14.3

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick (✓) the most appropriate option.

1. A bulb has a resistance of 20 Ω and the p.d across its terminals is V. If the bulb is usedfor t seconds then energy consumed by the bulb is :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 15

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 15.1

2. A current Iflows through a resistance R for the time ‘t’, the electric energy consumed by the resistance is :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 15.2

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 15.3

3. The unit for electric work in SI system :
(a) Joule
(b) watt
(c) watt second
(d) watt hour
Answer:
(a) Joule

4. An electric appliance has a rating of 1000 W – 200 V. The resistance of the element of electric appliance is :
(a) 200 Ω
(b) 400 Ω
(c) 40 Ω
(d) 4000 Ω
Answer:
(c) 40 Ω

5. Kilowatt hour is commercial unit of :
(a) power
(b) electric energy
(c) heat energy
(d) mechanical energy
Answer:
(b) electric energy

6. Kilowatt hour and kilowatt are :
(a) SI units of power and electric energy
(b) commercial units of power and electric energy
(c) SI units of-electric energy and power
(d) commercial units of electric energy and power
Answer:
(d) commercial units of electric energy and power

Numerical Problems on Electric Energy

Practice Problems 1

Question 1.
Calculate the energy released by a heater, which draws a current of 5A at 220 V for 1 min.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 16

Question 2.
An electric device consumes 8640 J of energy in 30 min. while operating at 24 V. Calculate the current drawn by the device.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 16.1

 

Practice Problems 2

Question 1.
An ekctric kettle draws a current of4A for 2.5 min. if the resistance of its element is 100 Ω , calculate the electric energy drawn by kettle in kilojoules.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 16.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 17

Question 2.
A soldering iron draws an energy of 43200 J in 4 min, when the current flowing through its element is 6 A, calculate the resistance of its heating element.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 17.1

Practice Problems 3

Question 1.
Calculate the heat energy given out by the filament of an electric bulb in 20 s, when its resistance is 4 Ω and p.d. across its ends in 12 V.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 17.2

Question 2.
An electric device gives out 5760 J of heat energy in 1 min, when current flows through it at a p.d. of 24 V. Find the resistance of the device.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 17.3

Practice Problems 4

Question 1.
An electric heater draws a current of 3.5 A at a p.d. of 250 V. Calculate the power of 4 such heaters.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 17.4
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 18

Question 2.
An electric bulb is rated 500 W – 200 V. Calculate the magnitude of current.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 18.1

 

Question 3.
An electric heater of power 1000 W, draws a current of 5.0 A. Calculate the line voltage.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 18.2

 

Practice Problems 5

Question 1.
An electric heater has a resistance of 40 Ω and draws a current of 4 A. Calculate :

  1. its power
  2. p.d. at its ends

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 18.3

Question 2.
An electric heater of power 900 W, has a resistance of 36 Ω Calculate the magnitude of current and the p.d. at its ends.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 18.4

Practice Problems 6

Question 1.
An electric motor of power 1000 W, operates at 250 V. Calculate the inductive resistance of motor and current flowing through it.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 19

Question 2.
An electric device operates at 24 V and has a resistance of 8 Ω Calculate the power of the device and current flowing through it
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 19.1

Practice Problems 7

Question 1.
An electric bulb is rated 200 W – 200 V. It is immersed in 200 g of oil (SHC 0.8 Jg-10 C-1) at 10°C. The bulb is switched on for 2 minutes. If all the electric energy is absorbed in the form of heat energy by the oil, calculate :

(a) Resistance of the filament of the bulb.
(b) Current flowing through the bulb.
(c) Final temperature of the oil.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 19.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 20

Question 2.
An electric kettle is rated 1000 W – 250 V. It is used to bring water at 20°C to its boiling point. If the kettle is used for 11 minutes and 12 seconds, calculate :

(a) Resistance of the element of the kettle.
(b) Current flowing through the element.
(c) Mass of water in the kettle [SHC of water = 4.2 Jg-10 C-1]

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 20.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 21

Practice Problems 8

Question 1.
Calculate the resistance of nichrome wire, which will bring 200 g of water at 20° C to its boiling points in 7 minutes, when current flowing through wire is 4A.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 21.1

Question 2.
Calculate p.d. at the ends of a power source which, supplies current to a 4 ohm resistance wire for 20 minutes and raises temperature of 400 g of water through 20 \(\mathring { c }\).
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 21.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 22

Question 3.
Calculate the current flowing through an electric drill, connected to 200 V supply, if it drills a hole in a metal plate of mass 500 g, such that its temperature rises from
10 \(\mathring { c }\) to 60 \(\mathring { c }\) in 5 minutes, assuming all the work done is converted into heat energy.
[S.H.C. of metal 0.6 Jg-1 \(\mathring { c }\)-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 22.1

Practice Problems 9

Question 1.
Circuit diagram shows four dry cells of e.m.f. 1.5 V and internal resistance 0.25 Ω connected to an external circuit A 3 Ω wire is immersed in 20 g of water at 20°C. The current switched on for 6 minutes and 36 seconds. Calculate :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 22.2

(a) Reading shown by the ammeter
(b) Current in 1.5 Ω wire
(c) Final temperature of water

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 23

Question 2.
A battery of 12 V and negligible internal resistance is connected to an external circuit consisting of three resistors of 6 Ω, 3 Ω and 2 Ω in parallel, which further connected to a resistance of 3 Ω in series to the battery. The 3 Ω resistance is immersed in 50 g oil of sp. heat capacity 0.8 Jg-10 C-1, when the temperature of the oil rises by 54 0C.

(a) Draw the labelled circuit diagram.
(b) Calculate the value of current in the tnain circuit.
(c) Calculate the current following in 2 Ω resistance in parallel.
(d) Calculate the time for which current is switched on.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 24
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 24.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 25

Practice Problems 10

Question 1.
An electric kettle rated 250 V can bring a certain amount of water to its boiling point in 8 min. If it is connected to 200 V mains, calculate the time in which water comes to its boiling point.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 25.1

 

Question 2.
An immersion heating rod is rated 220 V and can bring certain amount of water to its boiling point in 15 min. When this immersion rod is actually connected to an electric circuit, it brings the water to boil in 18.15 min. Calculate the line voltage.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 25.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 26

Practice Problems 11

Question 1.
An electric oven is marked 1000 W – 200 V. Calculate :

(a) Resistance of its element
(b) Energy consumed by the oven in 1/2 hour in joules.
(c) Time, in which ii will consume 15 kWh of energy.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 26.1

Question 2.
An electric motor is rated 2 HP – 250 V. Calculate :

(a) Current flowing through it
(b) Energy consumed by it in one second
(c) Time in which it will consume 90 kWh of energy. [1 HP = 750 W]

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 26.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 27

Practice Problems 12

Question 1.
A geyser is rated 2000 W and operates 2 hours a day on 200 V mains. Calculate the monthly bill for running the geyser when energy costs ₹ 1.90 per kWh.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 27.1

Question 2.
An electric oven of resistance 20 Ω draws a current of 10 A. It works 3 hours daily. Calculate the weekly bill when enregy costs ₹ 1.50 per kWh.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 27.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 28

Question 3.
An electric bulb draws a current of 0.8 A and works on 250 V on an average 8 hrs a day. If energy costs ₹ 1.50 per board of trade unit, calculate the monthly bill
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 28.1

Practice Problems 13

Question 1.
4 tube lights of 40 W each and 2 fans of 100 W each are connected to 200 V mains and operate on an average 8 hours a day. If energy costs ₹ 1.50 kWh, calculate

(a) monthly bill
(b) minimum fuse rating.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 28.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 29

Question 2.
An electric motor of 2 H.P. and two coolers of 500 W each operate on 250 V mains for 4 hours a day. If the energy costs ₹ 1.80 per kWh, calculate

(a) weekly bill
(b) minimum fuse rating. [Take 1 HP = 750 W]

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 29.1

Practice Problems 14

Question 1.
A boys hostel has following appliances when energy is supplied at 200 V and costs ₹ 5.25 per kWh.
(a) 40 bulbs of 100 W each, working 8 hours a day.
(b) 20 fans each drawing a current 9.8 A and working 15 hours a day.
(c) Two T.V. sets, each offering a resistance of 200 Ω and working 4 hours a day.
(d) Two electric motors of 1.5 H.P. each and working 4 hours a day

  1. Calculate the monthly bill
  2. Amongst the fuse of 48 A and 50 A which one you will use and why ?

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 30
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 30.1

Question 2.
An establishment receives electric energy at a rate of ₹ 4.50 per kWh at a p.d. of 240 V. It uses following appliances.
(a) 20 tube lights of 40 W each working 10 h a day.
(b) Two stero systems, each drawing a current of 2A and working 4h a day.
(c) Four ovens, each of resistance 24 Q working 6 h a day.
(d) Two cooling machines of 4 H.P. each working 15 hours a day.

  1. calculate monthly bill
  2. minimum fuse rating of circuit

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 31

Exercise – 2

Question 1.
(a) What do you understand by the term electric fuse ?
Answer:
Electric fuse : “Is a safety device which is used to limit the current in an electric circuit. The use of a fuse safe guards the circuit and the appliances connected in that circuit from being damaged.”

(b) Name a material from which an electric fuse is made.
Answer:
Material used for fuse is ‘Alloy of lead and Tin’ having low melting point and high resistance.”

(c) State two properties of a material which makes it suitable for an electric fuse.
Answer:
Two properties of material are :

  1. Low melting point
  2. High resistance.

(d) Draw a diagram of a fuse wire, connected in a fuse socket.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 32

Question 2.
(a) Why is a fuse wire always placed in a live wire ?
Answer:
So that ‘The fuse may melt first, before current reaches the appliance”.

(b) How does fuse wire protect an electric circuit ?
Answer:
When current in the circuit exceeds the specified value (due to any reason such as high voltage, short circuiting etc.) the fuse wire gets heated up to the extent that it melts. As a result a gap is produced and the circuit beaks. The current does not flow through the live wire and appliance is saved.

(c) Two fuse wires of the same length are rated 15A and 5A. Which of the two is thicker and why ?
Answer:
5A wire is thicker as resistance is α 1/a Thicker the wire less is resistance and electrons can run freely with less collisions.

(d) Why is it dangerous to replace a fuse wire with a copper wire?
Answer:
“Copper has low resistivity and high melting point and does not serve the purpose of fuse.”

Question 3.
(a) What do you understand by the term earthing ?
Answer:
Earthing : or Grounding : “Bringing the appliance to zero potential”.
“Earthing means to connect the metal case of electrical appliance to the earth (at zero potential) by means of a metal wire is called “Earth wire”.

(b) How does earthing protect a user from receiving an electric shock?
Answer:
When we connect the earth wire to the metal case of the electrical appliance by using three pinplug.
The metal casing of the appliance will now always remain at zero potential of the earth, this will avoid the risk of shock if we touch the metal body as the current passes directly to earth through the earth wire.

(c) How is a household circuit earthed ?
Answer:
The neutral and earth wires on supply end (power station) are connected potential together, so that both of them are at zone potential and inside the house live and neutral wires are connected to the input terminals of kWh meter, where as earth wire is connected to the body of kWh meter. The live wire coming out from the out put terminals of the kWh meter has another fuse in it, which is commonly called main fuse. The neutral wire and earthwire is common to all circuits.

(d) Explain how the fuse melts when a short circuit appliance gets earthed.
Answer:
When an earthed appliance gets short circuited, then current from its metal body flows into the earth. Since earth does not offer any resistance, therefore magnitude of the current in the circuit of a short-circuited appliance suddenly rises to a very high value.
This rise in magnitude of current in turn overloads the circuit, and hence. The fuse in that circuit melts.

Question 4.
(a) What is the function of a switch in an electric circuit?
Answer:
Function of a switch :
Function of a switch is to connect or disconnect an electric appliance in the electric circuit.

(b) Why is switched placed in a live wire ?
Answer:
Let the appliance (heater) when connected in a neutral wire, when the switch is in the off position and even if no current is flowing through the heater and it is not operating, how ever the heater is in contact with live wire and heating element is at the same potential as the live wire. Thus if we touch the heating coil of the heater, current will flow through our body giving us a severe shock and may prove fatal, this proves that switch should always be placed in the live wire.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 34

(c) what consequences will follow, if a switch is placed in the neutral wire ?
Answer:
Even if switch is in off position the appliance will be at the potential of live wire and current will flow through the appliance.

Question 5.
(a) Why is household wiring done in parallel ? Give at least two reasons ?
Answer:
Two advantages of parallel wiring :

  1. Electrical appliances get same voltage (220 V) as that of the power supply line.
  2. If one electrical appliance stops working due to some defect, then all other appliances keep working normally.

(b) What are the disadvantages of wiring in series in a house?
Answer:
Disadvantages in series circuit :

  1. Over all resistance increases and current from the power supply is low.
  2. If one electrical appliance stops working, due to some defect, then all other appliances also stop working.

Question 6.
Draw a circuit diagram for distribution of power from pole to the main switch and label it
Answer:
Circuit Diagram For Distribution Of Power From Pole To Main Switch :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 35

Question 7.
Name two systems of distribution of power in a house.Give the advantages and disadvantages of each system.
Answer:
Two systems of power distribution.
(i) Tree system Advantages

  1. All appliances are connected parallel and can be independently switched on and switched off.
  2. The neutral wire and earth wire is common to all circuits.
  3. From the main distribution board, circuits are taken out for different rooms.

Disadvantages :

  1. It is expensive and takes a long time to install.
  2. It requires plugs and sockets of different current value for different appliances depending upon their power rating.
  3. When a fuse in one particular line melts. It disconnects all appliances in that circuit.

(ii) Ring system :
Advantages :

  1. Every appliance has its own fuse and can be handled without disturbing other appliances.
  2. Length of wire used is very small.
  3. It is easier to install and maintain.

Question 8.
(a) State the colour of (i) live wire, (ii) neutral wire, (iii) earth wire according to international convention
(b) State the position of (i) earth pin, (ii) live pin and (iii) neutral pin in an electric plug.
(c) Why is the earth terminal of a plug made (i) thicker, (ii) longer
Answer:
(a) The colour of

  1. Live wire —– Brown
  2. Neutral wire —– Light Blue .
  3. Earth wire —– geen or Yellow

(b) Position of

  1. Earth pin —– is Long and Thicker so that it should not enter live or neutral cylinder of socket.
  2. Live pin —– L is on the right when earth pin goes into E, live pingoes into L.
  3. Neutral-pin —– N is on the left.When earth pin goes into E, live wire in L automatically neutral goes into N.

(c) Earth-pin is made thicker, so that it should not enter other cylinder of socket and helps in putting right pin in right place.
Longer —– So that earth connection is done first. This ensure the user will not get a shock.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick (✓) the most appropriate option.

1. A fuse wire is connected in before the switch.
(a) neutral wire
(b) earth wire
(c) live wire
(d) either (a) or (c)
Answer:
(c) live wire

2. A switch in a circuit is always connected in the :
(a) live wire
(b) earth wire
(c) neutral wire
(d) either (a) or (b)
Answer:
(a) live wire

3. According to old convention, the colour of neutral wire is :
(a) red
(b) green
(c) black
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) black

4. According to new convention, the colour of live wire is :
(a) light blue
(b) yellow
(c) green
(d) brown
Answer:
(d) brown

5. Which is not the characteristic of a fuse wire ?
(a) It has high resistance
(b) It has low melting point
(c) It has low resistance
(d) It is an alloy of lead and tin
Answer:
(c) It has low resistance

6. In a three pin plug the live pin in :
(a) thinner and is toward left
(b) thicker and is towards left
(c) thinner and is towards right
(d) thicker and is towards right
Answer:
(c) thinner and is towards right

7. In a household electric circuit all appliances are connected in :
(a) parallel circuit
(b) series circuit
(c) mixed circuit
(d) any of these
Answer:
(a) parallel circuit

8. An average lighting circuit of a cpoor family has a fuse rating of
(a) 10 A
(b) 15 A
(c) 5 A
(d) 2 A
Answer:
(c) 5 A

Questions From ICSE Examination Papers

2001

Question 1.
(a) Draw a diagram of ring main circuit for domestic distribution of electric power.
(b) Name the physical quantity which is measured in

  1. Kilowatt hour
  2. Kilowatt

Answer:
(a)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 39

(b) (1) kilowatt hour —– energy consumed.
(2) kilowatt —– power.

Question 2.
A bulb is marked 100 W – 220 V and an electric heater is marked 1000 W – 220 V Answer the following questions :

(a) What is the ratio of resistance of the filament of the bulb to the element of the heater ?
(b) How does power-voltage rating of an electric appliance help us to decide the type of connecting wires (leads) to be used for it ?
(c) In the above mentioned devices in 2(a) which of the two devices needs a thicker wire.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 39.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 40

(b) The rate of heat produced in a conductor is given by the expression I2 – R
Copper wires have low resistance and the heat produced in them is so small that it gets radiated out without damaging the insulation. If current increases the heat produced burns the insulation and bare-copper wires comes in contact with each other and will cause electric fire. Hence power-voltage rating helps to decide the type of connecting wires (leads) to be used for it so that it can tolerate the current flowing through it.
(c) In case of heater the lead should be thicker to offer less resistance.

Question 3.
(a) Calculate the daily household electric bill for a family which uses the following appliances for 8 hours a day, when electrical energy costs Rs. 2 per unit

  1. one 100 W bulb
  2. one 100 W fan
  3. one 1000 W heater.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 40.1


(b)
How does earthing protect a user from electric shocks ?
Answer:
When we connect the earth wire to the metal case of the electrical appliance by using three pinplug. The metal casing of the appliance with now always remain at zero potential of the earth, this will avoid the risk of shock if we happen to torch the metal body directly to earth through the earth wire.

2002

Question 4.
A geyser has a label 2 kW, 240 V. What is the cost of using it for 30 minutes, if the cost of electricity is Rs. 3.00 per commercial unit ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 41

Question 5.
Explain briefly the function of the following in the household wiring :

(a) a three-pin plug
(b) main switch.

Answer:

(a) Three-pin plug is a fixture provided with three cylindrical pins made of brass. The live pin is on the right, neutral pin on the left and earth pin is on the top. When inserted in the socket, its function is to provide a tight fitting between electrical circuit and the movable electric appliance.
(b) Main switch : It is the on-off device for current in a circuit or in a appliance. The switch should always be connected to live wire.

Question 6.
Make a table with the names of 3 electrical appliances used in home in one column, their power, voltage rating and approximate time for which each one is used in one day in the other columns.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 42

2003

Question 7.
An electric kettle is rated 2.5 kW, 250 V. Find the cost of running the kettle for two hours at 60 paise per unit.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 42.1

Question 8.
Two fuse wires of the same length are rated 5 A and 20 A. Which of the fuse wires is thicker and why ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 42.2

Question 9.
With reference to the given diagram, calculate

(a) Equivalent resistance between P and Q.
(b) The reading of the ammeter.
(c) The electrical power between P and Q.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 43

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 43.1

Question 10.
Electrical power P is given by the expression : P = (Q × V), time.

(a) What do the symbols Q and V represent ?
(b) Express ‘Power’ in terms of current and resistance explaining the symbols used there in.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 44

2004

Question 11.
State the purpose of a fuse in an electric circuit. Name thematerial required for making a fuse wire.
Answer:
Purpose of Fuse :

  1. The fuse limits the current in electric circuit and acts as a safety device.
  2. It saves us and protects us and our expensive appliances when circuit gets over loaded or higher current flows as the fuse blows off and current supply stops. Material used for making fuse wire is Lead and Tin alloy.

Question 12.
An electric bulb is rated 240V – 60 W and is working at 100% efficiency.
(a) Calculate the resistance of the bulb.
(b) If an identical bulb is connected in series with this bulb then:

  1. Draw the circuit diagram.
  2. What is the rate of conversion of energy in each bulb ?
  3. Total power used by the bulbs.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 44.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 45

2005

Question 13.
(a) In a three-pin plug, why is the earth pin made longer and thicker than the other two pins ?
Answer:
The earth pin is made longer and thicker, (i) So that earth connection is made first. This ensures the safety of the user because, (ii) It is made thick so that its resistance is low and any leakage of current flows easily into the earth

(b) An electrical appliance is rated 1500 W – 250 V. This appliance is connected to 250 V mains.
Calculate :

  1. the current drawn,
  2. the electrical energy consumed in 60 hours,
  3. the cost of electrical energy coi sumed at Rs. 2.50 per KWH.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 45.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 46

2006

Question 14.
Draw a labelled diagram of a three-pin socket.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 46.1

Question 15.
Find the cost of operating an electric toaster for 2 hours, if it draws a current of 8A on a 110 V circuit. The cost of electrical energy is Rs. 2.50 per kWh.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 46.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 47

2007

Question 16.
Of the three connecting wires in a household circuit :

(a) Which two of the three wires are at the same potential ?
(b) In which of the three wires should the switch be connected ?

Answer:

(a) Of the three wires, the Earth wire and the Neutral wire are at the same potential of zero.
(b) The switch should be connected in the Live wire.

Question 17.
What is meant by earthing of an electrical appliance ? Why is it essential ?
Answer:
By earthing we mean that the metallic body of an electrical appliance is connected to thick wire of copper which is buried deep in the earth and at its end is a copper plate surrounded by a mixture of charcoal and common salt. It is essential to avoid any shock when the metal casing of the appliance happens to touch the live wire. The current due to short circuiting flows to the earth instead of through the human body.

2008

Question 18.
(a) Draw a labelled diagram of the staircase wiring for a dual control switch showing a bulb in the circuit.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 47.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 48

(b) The electrical gadgets used in a house such as bulbs, fans, heater, etc., are always connected in parallel, NOT in series. Give two reasons for connecting them in parallel.
Answer:
All electrical gadgets are connected in parallel because

  1. All appliances will get same potential difference in parallel so flow of any one appliance is not affected on switching on or off, of other appliance.
  2. In parallel arrangement if one appliance is switched off or fuses, other can effectively work.

(c) An electrical heater is rated 4 kW, 220 V. Find the cost of using this heater for 12 hours if one kWh of electrical energy costs Rs. 3.25.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 48.1

Question 19.
How does the heat produced in a wire or a conductor depend upon the :

(a) current passing through the conductor.
(b) resistance of the conductor ?

Answer:
Heat produced in a conductor is directly proportional to
(a) the square of current and (b) the resistance of conductor.
H = I2 Rt
H α I2 i.e. square of current following
H α R i.e. directly proportional to the resistance of conductor

2009

Question 20.
(a) An electric heater is rated 1000 W – 200 V. Calculate :

  1. the resistance of the heating element.
  2. the current flowing through it.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 49

(b) (i) Give two characteristic properties of copper wire which make it unsuitable for use as fuse wire.
(ii) Name the material which is used as a fuse wire ?
Answer:
(i) Copper cannot be used as fuse wire because :

(a) it has high melting point
(b) low resistivity

(ii) Alloy of lead and tin.

Question 21.
(a) The diagrams (i) and (ii) given alongside are of a plug and a socket with arrows marked a as 1, 2,3 and 4, 5, 6 respectively on them. Identify and write Live (L), Neutral (N) and Earth (E) against the correct number.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 50
(b) Calculate the electrical energy consumed when a bulb of 40 W is used for 12.5 hours everyday for 30 days.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 50.1

 

2010

Question 22.
(a) Which part of an electrical appliance is earthed ?
(b) State a relation between electrical power, resistance and potential difference in an electrical circuit.
Answer:
(a) The metallic part of an electrical appliance is earthed.
(b) The required relation is P = v2 / p where P is power, V the potential difference and R is the resistance.

Question 23.

(a) In what unit does the domestic electric meter measure the electrical energy consumed? State the value of this unit in S.I. Unit.
(b) Why should switches always be connected to the live wire?
(c) Give one precaution that should be taken while handling switches.

Answer:

  1. The domestic electric meter measure, the electric energy in kWh.
    1 kWh = 3.6 × 106 J
  2. The switch should always be connected to the live wire, so that current is cut off to that appliance to which it is connected.
  3. The switches should not be touched with wet hand otherwise we may receive a shock.

Question 24.
Calculate the quantity of heat that will be produced in a coil of resistance 75 Ω if a current of 2 A is passed through it for 2 minutes.
Answer:
Here, R = 75 Ω, i = 2A, t = 2 minutes = 2 × 60 = 120 s
Now, Heat produced
H = i2 Rt
= 2 × 2 × 75 × 120 J = 36000 J

2011

Question 25.
(a) Two bulbs are marked 100 W, 220 V and 60 W, 110 V. Calculate the ratio of their resistances.
(b) (i) What is the colour code for insulation of earth wire?
(ii) Write an expression for calculating electric power in terms of current and resistance.
(c) (i) Name two safety devices which are connected to the live wire of a household electrical circuit.
(ii) Give one important function of each of these devices.
(d) (i) An electric bulb is marked 100 W, 250 V. What information does this convey ?
(ii) How much current will the bulb draw if connected to 250 V supply ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 52
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 53

2012

Question 26.
(a) An electrical appliance is rated at 1000 kVA, 220V. If the appliance is operated for 2 hours, calculate the energy consumed by the appliance in :
(i) kWh (ii) joule
(b) (i) What is the purpose of using a fuse in an electrical circuit?
(ii) What are the characteristic properties of a fuse wire ?
(c) (i) Write an expression for the electrical energy spent in the flow of current through an electrical appliance in terms of I, R and t.
(ii) At what voltage is the alternating current supplied to our houses ?
(iii) How should the electric lamps in a building be connected?
Answer:
(a) (i) Energy consumed in kWh = 1000 kVA × 2h = 2000 kWh.
(ii) Energy consumed in Joules = 1000 × 1000 VA × 2 × 3600 s
= 7,200,000,000 J = 7.2 × 109 J
(b) (i) The fuse wire melts and stops the flow of electric current in a given circuit, in case the circuit is overloaded or short circuited.
(ii) 1. Fuse wire should have low melting point around 200°C.
2. Fuse wire should have high electrical resistance.
(c) (i) Electrical energy (E) = I2.R.f.
(ii) Alternating current is supplied at 220V for domestic consumption.
(iii) All lamps should be connected in parallel.

2013

Question 27.
(a) (i) Name the device used to protect the electric circuits from overloading and short circuits.
(ii) On what effect of electricity does the above device work?
Answer:

  1. Electric fuse.
  2. It works on the heating effect of electric current.

(b)(i) An electrical gadget can give an electric shock to its user under certain circumstances. Mention any two of these circumstances.
(ii) What preventive measure provided in a gadget can protect a person from an electric shock ?
Answer:
(a) (i) The electrical gadget may be short circuited i.e., its live or neutral wire is touching its metallic body directly.
(ii) The hands of the user may be wet, such that water dripping from his hands makes contact with the live wire.
(b) The body of the electric gadget is connected to the earth terminal by means of earth wire. In case of short circuit a huge surge of current flows through the earth terminal. This in turn melts fuse in the live wire and hence the flow or current stops in the gadget.

2014

Question 28.
(i) Two sets A and B, of the three bulbs each, are glowing in two separate rooms. When one of the bulbs in set A is fused, the other two bulbs, cease to glow. But in set B, when one bulb fuses, the other two bulbs continue to glow. Explain why this phenomenon occurs.
(ii) Why do we prefer arrangement of Set B for house hold circuiting?
Answer:

  1. The bulbs of set A are connected in series. Therefore when one bulb fuse the current stop flowing. Whereas the bulbs of set B are connected in parallel. When one bulb fuse then current flows through the other bulb.
  2. Set B prefer parallel combination because in it potential difference remains same.

2015

Question 29.
(a) Fill in the blanks space.
For a fuse, higher the current rating _____ is the fuse wire.
Answer:
For a fuse, higher the current rating, thicker is the fuse wire.

(b) (i) Name the device used to increase the voltage at a generating station.
(ii) At what frequency is AC supplied to residential houses?
(iii) Name the wire in a household electrical circuit to which the switch is connected.
Answer:

  1. The device used to increase voltage at the generating station is the step-up transformer.
  2. The residential houses are supplied with AC of frequency 50 Hz.
  3. The switch is connected to the live (or phase) wire in a house¬hold electric circuit.

2016

Question 30.
(a) Calculate the quantity of heat produced in a 20 Ω resistor carrying 2.5 A current in 5 minutes.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits 55

(b) State the characteristics required in a material to be used as an effective fuse wire.
Answer:
The material should have high resistivity and low melting point.

(c) (i) Which particles are responsible for current in conductors?
(ii) To which wire of a cable in power circuit should the metal case of a geyser be connected ?
(iii) To which wire should the fuse be connected ?
Answer:

  1. Moving Electrons are responsible for current in conductors.
  2. The metal case of a geyser should be connected to the Earth wire.
  3. The fuse should always be connected to the live wire.

More Resources

Hope given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electric Energy, Power & Household Circuits are helpful to complete your science homework.

If you have any doubts, please comment below. APlusTopper try to provide online science tutoring for you.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light

These Solutions are part of A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions. Here we have given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light

Exercise – 1

Question 1.
(a) What do you understand by the term refraction of light?
(b) How does the light deviate when it travels from ?

  1. a rarer to a denser medium
  2. a denser to a rarer medium?

Answer:
(a) Refraction of light : “When light travels from one optical medium to other optical medium, it changes its path, this change in path is called refraction of light”.
(b) (i) Towards the normal, (ii) Away from normal.

Question 2.

(a) State the laws of refraction.
(b) What do you understand by the statement that refractive index of water is 1.33 ?

Answer:
(a) Laws of refraction :
(i) Snell’s law : The ratio between the values of the sine of angle of incidence and the sine of angle of refraction for two given optical media is a constant quantity.
µ = sin i / sin r
(ii) The incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal lie on the same plane at the point of incidence.
(b) Refractive index of water is 1.33 means that speed of light in air is 1.33 times faster than in water.

Question 3.
Describe how will you verify the laws of refraction ?
Answer:
Experiment To Verify The Laws :
Fix a white sheet of paper on a drawing board. Place a rectangular glass slab in the middle of paper and draw its boundry with a pencil. The block is removed and on the boundry line KL a point O is chosen and a normal is drawn.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 6
Through O a line OA at an angle i (say 60°) with the normal is drawn. The block is replaced on its boundry line. Two pins a and b are fixed vertically on the board about 10 cm apart on the line AO. Looking from the other side NM of the slab two more pins c and d are fixed such that legs of pins c and d and images of pins a and b seen through glass are in a straight line.
Pins are removed and pin pricks are marked with pencil.
Slab is removed and marks c and d are joined by line BC to meet the boundry at B. OB is joined.
AO represents INCIDENT RAY
BC represents EMERGENT RAY
OB represents REFRACTED RAY
∠ AON represents ANGLE OF INCIDENCE i
∠BOM represents ANGLE OF REFRACTION r
with O as centre and suitable radius draw a circle intersecting AO at X and OB at Y.
Draw normals XY and X’ Y’. Measure XY and X’ Y’.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 7

Question 4.

(a) What do you understand by the term lateral displacement ?
(b) State three factors which determine lateral displacement ?

Answer:
(a) Lateral Displacement : “The perpendicular shift in the path of the incident ray while emerging out of an optical slab is called Lateral Displacement.”
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 8
(b) Factors :

  1. Angle of incidence
  2. Thickness of optical slab
  3. Refractive index of opitcal material.
  4. Wavelength of light.

Question 5.
By drawing neat diagrams explain :

(a) Why does a stick immersed obliquely in water, appear bent and short ?
(b) Why does a stamp placed under a glass block, appear raised?
(c) Why is twilight formed, before sunrise or sunset ?
(d) Why do stars twinkle, but not the planets ?
(e) Why do the faces of people sitting around a camp fire appear to shimmer ?
(f) Why does a tank filled with water and seen from above appear shallow ?
(g) Why does a fisherman aim his spear at the tail of a fish during spear fishing.
(h) Why is more than one image formed in a thick glass mirror?
(i) Why does the sun appear bigger during sunrise or sunset?

Answer:
(a) The stick appears to be bent and raised up in place of BA as BA’ due to refraction of light on passing from denser medium (water) to rarer medium (air)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 9
(b) A stamp placed under a glass block appears raised because of refraction of light as light travels from denser to rarer medium, also due to R.I of glass observed depth is less than real depth.
(c) Twilight is formed, before the sunrise or sun set due to refraction of sun light as even when the sun is below the horizon its rays manage to reach the earth due to refraction.
(d) Stars twinkle : because of refraction of light as light passes through different layers of air of different densities mix, changes the apparent position of star. When the star is with in the line of sight it is visible but when it falls out of the line of sight, it is no longer visible. The collective effect of the above changes shift the apparent position of the star and it appears to twinkle.
Planets do not twinkle : Planets are very close to us compared to the stars. Their apparent of position also changes with change of density of different layers of the atmosphere. However the size of their apparent image is still fairly large and seldom fall out side the line of sight. Hence they do not appear to twinkle.
(e) The rays of light reflected from the face of the person, sitting opposite to you, on passing through hot air (produced by burning wood), get refracted. Since the hot air is rapidly moving and its density is continuously changing, therefore the path of the refracted rays also changes. This gives rise to the shimmering effect and person appears to shimmer.
(f) Due to refraction of light when light travels from optically denser medium (water) to optically rarer medium (air) observed depth is less than real depth, and the water tank appears to be shallow.
(g) Due to refraction of light when light travels from denser medium (water) to rarer medium (air). The real depth is more than apparent depth.
(h) In a thick glass mirror, light partially gets reflected (4%) and remaining 96% passes into the glass plate suffers refraction again and again and multiple images are formed.
(i) Sun appears to be bigger during sun set or sun rise as “The rays of light travel through maximum length of atmosphere” due to refraction, the image of sun is very much closer to the eye. Thus, it appears bigger.

Question 6.
What is refractive index of a material ? How is it related to (a) real and apparent depth (b) velocity of light in vacuum or air and the velocity of light in a given medium?
Answer:
Refractive index of a material : “Is the ratio of speed of light in vacuum (air) to the speed of light in that material”.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 10

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick (✓) the most appropriate option.

1. When a beam of light strikes a glass slab a part of it is :
(a) reflected
(b) absorbed
(c) transmitted
(d) all of these
Answer:
(a) reflected

2. The phenomenon due to which a ray of light deviates from its path while travelling from one optical medium to another optical medium is called :
(a) dispersion
(b) refraction
(c) reflection
(d) diffraction
Answer:
(b) refraction

3. When a ray of light travelling in an optically denser medium, emerges into an optically less denser medium it :
(a) deviates towards the normal
(b) deviates away from normal
(c) does not deviate
(d) gets reflected
Answer:
(b) deviates away from normal

4. A ray of light strikes a glass slab at 90°. The angle of incidence is :
(a) 90°
(b) zero
(c) less than 90°, but not zero
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) zero

5. Two medium ‘a’ and ‘b’ have same refractive index. A ray of light travelling from medium ‘a ’ to medium ‘b’. will suffer?
(a) refraction at the interfaces
(b) partly suffer reflection at the interfaces
(c) partly gets absorbed in medium ‘b ’
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(b) partly suffer reflection at the interfaces

6. A ray of light on entering from medium ‘a’ to medium ‘b ’ does not suffer refraction. The angle of incidence in medium ‘a ’ is :
(a) 90°
(b) zero
(c) 45°
(d) 60°
Answer:
(b) zero

7. During sun rise or sun set, the sun appears bigger because the rays of light coming from it pass through
(a) larger length of atmosphere
(b) smaller length of atmosphere
(c) the earth gets closer to sun
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) larger length of atmosphere

8. The highest refractive index is of:
(a) glass
(b) water
(c) diamond
(d) cold air
Answer:
(d) cold air

9. During spear fishing a fisherman aims at the :
(a) tail of fish
(b) head of fish
(c) slightly ahead of the head of fish
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) tail of fish

10. When a ray of light enters into another optical medium, its wavelength and velocity change. The material in which wavelength and velocity decrease maximum, when the ray is travelling through air is :
(a) alcohol
(b) diamond
(c) glass
(d) water
Answer:
(b) diamond

11. A thick glass slab with a silvered side forms multiple images on account of :
(a) reflection of light
(b) dispersion of light
(c) refraction of light
(d) both reflection and refraction of light
Answer:
(d) both reflection and refraction of light

Numarical Problems on Refraction of Light Through Optical Slabs

Practice Problem 1

Question 1.
The velocity of light in air is 3 × 108 ms-1 and in glass is 2 × 108 ms-1 Find the refractive index of glass.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 13

Question 2.
The velocity of light in air is 3 × 108 ms-1. Calculate the velocity of light in diamond or refractive index 2.5.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 13.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 14

Practice Problem 2

Question 1.
The angle of refraction in a glass block of refractive index 1.5 is 19°. Calculate the angle of incidence.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 14.1

Question 2.
Calculate the refractive index of a material, when angle of incidence in air is 50° and angle of refraction in the material is 36°.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 14.2

Practice Problem 3

Question 1.
A coin is placed at a depth of 15 cm in a beaker containing water. The refractive index of water is 4/3, calculate height through which the image of the coin is raised.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 14.3

Question 2.
The floor of a water tank appears at a depth of 2.5 m. If the refractive index of water is 1.33, find the actual depth of water.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 15

Practice Problem 4

Question 1.
A stone placed at the bottom of a water tank appears raised by 80 cm. If the refractive index of water is 4/3, find the actual depth of water in the tank :
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 15.1

Exercise – 2

Question 1.
(a) What do you understand by the following terms.

  1. Total intenta! reflection
  2. Critical angle ?

(b) Stale two conditions for total internal reflection ?
Answer:
(a) (i) Total internal reflection : When ray of light travels from optically denser medium to optically rarer medium and ∠i is greater than critical angle ∠r becomes more than 90° and reflects in the same denser medium and obeys the laws of reflection. The phenomenon is called total internal reflection. Hence total internal reflection : “The phenomenon due to which, a ray of light while travelling from denser medium to rarer medium gets reflected totally intenally (i.e. in the some denser medium) at the surface of separation is called total internal reflection.” i.e. ∠A’ON = ∠B’ON
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 16
(ii) Critical angle : When a ray of light travels from denser to rarer medium angle of incidence for when angle of refraction is of 90°, then this angle of incidence is called critical angle” i.e. ∠AON = critical angle
∵ Angle of refraction ∠N’OB = 90°
(b) Two conditions for total internal reflection :

  1. light should travel from denser to rarer medium.
  2. Angle of incidence should be more than critical angle.

Question 2.

(a) What do you understand by the statement, “critical angle for water is 48° ?
(b) Explain, how that refractive index of material is related to the critical angle.

Answer:
(a) The statement the critical angle for water is 48° means if light in water travels at ∠i = 48° it will come out in air along the surface of water
[i.e. ∠r = 90° ]
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 17

Question 3.
Explain the following :

(a) An empty test tube placed obliquely in water, appears to be filled with mercury.
(b) Bubbles rising up in a fish tank appear silvery.
(c) Air bubbles trapped in a glass paper weight appear silvery.
(d) A crack in window pane appear silvery.
(e) Diamonds sparkle for sometime in dark.
(f) The top surface of water contained in a beaker and held above the eye level appear silvery.

Answer:
(a) An empty test tube placed in water with its mouth up ward and out side the water surface shines like mercury when seen at certain angle greater than critical angle of water. This is due to total internal reflection of light.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 17.1
(b) This is due to total internal reflection. When light rays strike the bubbles at angle greater than 48°C which is critical angle of water.
(c) This is due to total internal reflection of light. Light rays strike the glass-air interface at angle more than critical angle of glass (42°) and get totally internally reflected.
(d) A crack in a glass window pane appear silvery on account of the presence of air in the crack due to total internal reflection.
(e) Diamond is cut in such a way that a number of refracting surfaces are present and total internal reflection takes place at a number of places and critical angle of diamond beings 24° cuts at very sharp angles are made so that the ray gets trapped with in the diamond for some time.
(f) When light gets totally internally reflected at water air interface, it appears silvery.

Question 4.

(a) What is a totally reflecting prism ?
(b) By drawing neat diagram explain how totally reflecting prisms are used to turn (i) rays through 90° (ii) rays through 180°.
(c) How is a totally reflecting prism used as an erecting prism ?

Answer:
(a) Totally reflecting prism : “A prism having on angle of 90° between its two refraction surfaces and the other two angles each equal to 45° is called total reflecting prism because the light incident normally on any of its faces, suffers total internal reflection inside the prims.”
(b)

  1. To turn rays through 90°
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 18
  2. To turn rays through 180°
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 19

(c) Totally reflecting prism as erecting prism :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 19.1

Light rays from object PQ suffer refraction air to glass and strike the face AC of prism from glass to air at angle greater than critical angle (42°) and suffers total internal reflection. Then strikes face BC at angle less than critical angle and suffers refraction from glass to air and bends a way from normal and beam emerges parallel to face AC. Erect image P’Q’ is obtained and prism acts as erecting prism.

Question 5.
(a) Trace the course of rays through an equilateral glass prism, showing clearly

  1. angle of incidence
  2. angle of refraction
  3. angle of the prism
  4. angle of deviation
  5. angle of emergence.

(b) On what factors do the angle of deviation in a prism depend?
(c) What do you understand by the term angle of minimum deviation ? In this position how is the angle of incidence related to the angle of emergence ?
Answer:
(a) The course of rays through equilateral glass prism :

  1. ∠OPN – angle of incidence
  2. Angle of refraction ∠NPQ is angle of refraction
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 20
  3. ∠BAC is angle of prism.
  4. Angle of deviation ∠LMR
  5. Angle of emergence e

(b) Factors effecting the angle of deviation :

  1. The angle of incidence i
  2. Angle of prism (A)
  3. Colour of wavelength (λ) of light used.
  4. R.I. of prism (material of prism).

(c) Angle of minimum deviation : The angle between incident ray produced and emergent ray produced is called angle of deviation. The angle of deviation decreases with increase in angle of incidence. A stage comes when for a particular value of angle of incidence, the angle of deviation is minimum.
If the angle of incidence is further increased, the angle, of deviation starts increasing. Hence
Angle of minimum deviation is the angle of incidence for which angle of deviation is minimum.

Question 6.
State four differences between reflection and total internal reflection.
Answer:
Total Internal Reflection :

  1. The entire light is reflected.
  2. There is no loss of energy.
  3. It takes place only when light passes from denser to rarer medium at an angle of incidence is greater than critical angle.
  4. The image is much brighter.

Reflection :

  1. Only a part of light is reflected Rest is refracted and absorbed.
  2. The energy of reflected ray is less than incident ray.
  3. It takes place when light is incident on plane mirror from any medium at any angle of incidence.
  4. The image is less bright.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick (✓) the most appropriate option.

1. For total internal reflection to take place a ray of light must :
(a) travel from denser to rarer medium
(b) travel from rarer to denser medium
(c) medium does not play any role
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) travel from denser to rarer medium

2. The critical angle for glass is 42°. The corresponding angle of refraction is :
(a) 0°
(b) 90°
(c) lesser than 90° but more than 42°
(d) no angle of refraction.
Answer:
(b) 90°

3. The critical angle for a material X is 45°. The total internal reflection will take place, if the angle of incidence in the denser medium is :
(a) less than 45°
(b) 90°
(c) more than 45°, but not 90°
(d) less than 45°, but not zero degree
Answer:
(c) more than 45°, but not 90°

4. Diamonds sparkle more than the glass, because they have :
(a) smaller critical angle than the glass
(b) larger critical angle than the glass
(c) critical angle plays no role
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) critical angle plays no role

5. Small air bubbles rising up a fish tank appear silvery when viewed from some particular angle because of the phenomenon of :
(a) reflection
(b) refraction
(c) total internal reflection
(d) dispersion
Answer:
(c) total internal reflection

6. An isosceles totally reflecting prism can reflect rays through an angle of :
(a) 60°
(b) 90°
(c) 180°
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (b) and (c)

7. A ray of light is incident on the face of an equilateral prism at angle of 90°. The ray gets totally reflected on the second refracting face. The total deviation produced in the path of ray is :
(a) 60°
(b) 90°
(c) 120°
(d) 180°
Answer:
(c) 120°

8. A crack in the window pane appears silvery when viewed from some particular angle. This phenomenon due to :
(a) refelction light
(b) refraction of light
(c) total internal reflection of light
(d) dispersion of light
Answer:
(c) total internal reflection of light

9. When an equilateral prism is in minimum deviation position the angle of incidence is :
(a) greater than the angle of emergence
(b) smaller than the angle of emergence
(c) equal to the angle of emergence
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) equal to the angle of emergence

10. A prism has :
(a) two rectangular and three triangular surfaces
(b) two triangular and three rectangular surfaces
(c) three rectangular and three triangular surfaces
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) two triangular and three rectangular surfaces

11. When a ray of light passes through an equilateral glass prism :
(a) it suffers refraction on the first refracting surfaces
(b) it suffers refraction on both the refracting surfaces
(c) it bends towards the base on both refracting surfaces
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (b) and (c)

Numerical Problems on Lenses

Practice Problems 1

Question 1.
A convex lens of focal length 10 cm is placed at a distance of 60 cm from a screen. How far from the lens should be placed an object so as to obtain a real image on the screen? Calculate the magnification of the image and its characteristics.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 24

Question 2.
An object of height 3 cm is placed at a distance of 24 cm from a convex lens of focal length 10 cm, when an image is formed on the screen on the other side of the lens. Calculate

(a) the distance of the screen from the lens
(b) the size of image
(c) the characteristics of image.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 24.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 25

Practice Problems 2

Question 1.
An object when placed in front of a convex lens forms a real image of 0.5 magnification. If the distance of the image from the lens is 24 cm, calculate focal length of the lens.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 25.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 26

Question 2.
A convex lens forms a real image 4 times magnified when placed at a distance of 6 cm from the lens. Calculate the focal length of the lens.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 26.1

Practice Problems 3

Question 1.
An object 1.4 cm high when placed in front of a convex lens at a distance of 6 cm, forms a virtual image at a distance of 24 cm from the lens. Calculate

(a) the focal length of the lens
(b) the size of the image.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 27

Question 2.
A convex lens forms a 2.5 times magnified virtual image when an object is placed at a distance of 8 cm from the lens. Calculate

(a) the distance of the image from the lens
(b) the focal length of lens.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 27.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 28

Question 3.
An object 1 cm high is placed at a distance of 4 cm from a convex lens of focal length 6 cm. Calculate

(a) the position of the image
(b) size of a image. State the characteristics of the image.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 28.1

Practice Problems 4

Question 1.
An object 2 cm high is placed at a distance of 25 cm from the optical centre of a concave lens offocal length 15 cm. Calculate

(a) the position of the image
(b) the size of the image.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 28.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 29

Question 2.
A concave lens forms 4 times diminished and virtual image when an object is placed at a distance of 80 cm. Calculate

(a) the position of the image
(b) the focal length of the lens.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 29.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 30

Question 3.
A concave lens has focal length 15 cm. At what distance should the object from the lens be placed, so as to form an image at 10 cm from the lens. Also find magnification of the lens.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 30.1

Practice Problems 5

Question 1.
A converging lens has a focal length 40 cm. Calculate its power.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 31

Question 2.
A lens which forms a real image has a focal length 8 cm. Calculate its power.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 31.1

Practice Problems 6

Question 1.
State the nature of the lens and the focal length if its power is +4D.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 31.2

Question 2.
The number of the glasses of a person is +0.75 D. What is the nature of the lens and what is its focal length ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 32

Practice Problems 7

Question 1.
The focal length of a concave lens is 10 cm. Calculate its power.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 32.1

Question 2.
The focal length of the lens of a myopic person is 40 cm. What is the power of the lens ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 32.2

Practice Problems 8

Question 1.
Calculate the focal length of a lens of power -2.75 D.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 33
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 33.1

Question 2.
The power of a concave lens is -12.5 D. What is the focal length of the lens ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 33.2

Exercise – 3

Question 1.

(a) What do you understand by the term lens ?
(b) What ar the various kinds of lenses ? Draw a neat diagram of each kind.

Answer:
(a) Lens : “Is a piece of transparent optical medium material having one or two spherical surfaces.”
Or
“A lens is a transparent refracting medium bounded by two curved surfaces which art generally spherical.”
(b) There are two types of lenses :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 33.3
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 34

Question 2.
Define the following with respect to converging lens

  1. principal axis
  2. optical centre
  3. first principal focus
  4. second principal focus
  5. focal length.

Answer:
(i) Principal axis : “It is the line joining the centres of curvature of the two surfaces of the lens.”
(ii) Optical centre : It is a point on the principal axis of the lens such that a ray of light passing through this point emerges parallel to its direction of incidence.”
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 34.1
(iii) First principal focus : “Is is a point on the principal axis of a convex lens, such that the rays starting from it, after refraction travel parallel to the principal axis.”
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 34.2
(iv) Second Principal focus : “It is a point on the principal axis, such that rays coming parallel to the principal axis after refraction through the lens actually meet here.”
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 35
(v) Focal Length : “The distance between focus and optical centre of a lens is called focal lens.”

Question 3.
Draw neat diagrams for the formation of images in case of convex lens and state its characteristics when the object is :

  1. at infinity
  2. between 2F and infinity
  3. at 2F
  4. in between F and 2F
  5. at F.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 35.1

(i) Characteristics of image :

  1. Real
  2. Inverted
  3. Highly diminished
  4. at F on right side of lens.

(ii) Object between 2F and infinity : Image formed is

  1. Real
  2. Inverted
  3. Diminished
  4. Between F and 2F.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 36

(iii) object at 2F
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 36.1

Image formed is :

  1. Real
  2. Inverted
  3. At 2F on right side of lens
  4. same size of object

(iv) Object lies between F and 2F :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 36.2
Image formed is :

  1. Real
  2. Inverted
  3. Magnified
  4. Beyond 2F on Right side of lens.

(v) Object at F :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 37

(i) at infinity (rays after passing lens become)
(ii) Real
(iii) Inverted parallel

Question 4.
Draw a neat diagram for a simple microscope.
Answer:
Diagram of simple microscope :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 37.1

When object lies between F and lens, its image is magnified, erect and on the same side of object which can be seen by eye. Hence this arrangement acts a simple microscope.

Question 5.
Draw neat diagrams for the formation of images in case of concave lens and state their characteristics when the object is :

  1. at infinity
  2. anywhere between infinity and the optical centre

Answer:
(i) Object at infinity :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 38

Image formed is

  1. at second focus F2
  2. virtual
  3. erect
  4. highly diminished.

(ii) Object lies anywhere between infinity and optical centre.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 38.1
The image is formed between F and optical centre is virtual erect and diminished.

Question 6.
How will you find the focal length of a convex lens, by using a single pin and a plane mirror ?
Answer:
Since rays after refraction through lens become parallel and ray after reflection from mirror meet at original point S, S is the focus and distance between S and lens is focal length. Even if the mirror is moved to any position, here at focal length, the parallel ray will meet at S (i.e. focus)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 39

Question 7.
You are required to form an upright image of an object in case of (a) convex lens, (b) concave lens. What will be the position of the object with respect to the lens in each case ? Support your answer by diagrams and state the characteristics of the image in each case :
Answer:
Upright image of an object incase of

(a) Convex lens : The position of object is between and optical centre.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 39.1
(b) Concave lens : The position of object is anywhere between infinity and optical centre.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 40


Multiple Choice Questions

Tick (✓) the most appropriate option.

1. The point on the principal axis of a convex lens, such that rays of light starting from it on passing through the lens, move parallel to the principal axis is called :
(a) first focal point
(b) second focal point
(c) optical centre
(d) aperture of lens
Answer:
(a) first focal point

2. A convex lens can be regarded as a set of prisms and a glass slab, such that refracting angle of the prisms
(a) continuously decreases in outward direction
(b) continuously increases in outward direction
(c) remains same in outward direction
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) continuously decreases in outward direction

3. A lens forms an inverted image of an object equal to its own size. The object is :
(a) beyond infinity and 2F1
(b) at 2F1
(c) between 2F1 and F1
(d) in between F1 and optical centre
Answer:
(b) at 2F1

4. A convex lens will form a virtual, erect and enlarged image, when the object is :
(a) between 2F1 and F1
(b) 2F1
(c) 2F1 and infinity
(d) F1 and optical centre
Answer:
(d) F1 and optical centre

5. A concave lens always forms :
(a) real, inverted and enlarged image
(b) virtual, inverted and enlarged image
(c) virtual, erect and diminished image
(d) virtual, erect and enlarged image
Answer:
(c) virtual, erect and diminished image

Questions from ICSE Examination Papers

2003

Question 1.
(a) A ray of light, after refraction through a concave lens, emerges parallel to the principal axis. Draw a ray diagram to show the incident ray and its corresponding emergent ray.
(b) The velocity of light in diamond is 21,000 kms-1 What is its refractive index of diamond? (Velocity of light in a air 3 × 108 m/s)
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 41
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 42

Question 2.
A monochromatic point source of light ‘O ’ is seen through a rectangular glass block ABCD. Paths of two rays, in and outside the block, are shown in figure above.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 42.1

(a) Does the source monochromatic source appear to be nearer or farther with respect to the surface AB ?
(b) How does the shift in (a) depend up on the thickness (AD) of the glass block ?
(c) Justify your answer in (b) with an appropriate ray diagram.
(d) For the same rectangular block, which colour from the visible spectrum will produce the maximum shift ?

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 42.2

(c) With thickness AD, the image is at I while for thickness AE (< AD), the image is at I’ and shift OA’ < shift OI when thickness decreases.
(d) The same rectangular glass block will produce Maximum shift is of VIOLET COLOUR LIGHT incident on it for which the refractive index of glass is most.

Question 3.
A postage stamp appears raised by 7.00 mm when placed under a glass block of refractive index 1.5. Find the thickness of the glass block.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 43

2004

Question 4.
(a) What do you understand by the term critical angle ?
Answer:
It is the angle of incidence of a light ray in a denser medium for which the angle of refraction in a rarer medium is 90°.

(b) Diagram below shows a path of ray AB through an isosceles right angled prism. What is the magnitude of the angle of incidence on (i) face PR (ii) PQ ?
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 43.1
Answer:
Angle of incidence at the face PR is 90°
Angle of incidence of the face PQ is 45°

Question 5.
The diagram given below shows the position of an object and its image. Copy the diagram and then by drawing two rays locate the position of the lens and its focus, showing clearly the kind of lens used.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 44
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 44.1

As the image is magnified and on the same side of object, the lens must be convex. The object lies within focus and lens.
The lens is convex.

Question 6.
(a) State the Snell’s law of refraction.
Answer:
Second law of refraction i.e. sin i / sin r = µ is called Snell’s Law.
SNELL’S LAW : which states that “It is the ratio of sine of angle of INCIDENCE to sine of angle of REFRACTION is constant for a pair of media.”
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 44.2

(b) If the velocity of light in air is 3 × 108 m s-1 and refractive index of glass 1-5, calculate the velocity of light in glass.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 45

2005

Question 7.
Mention two properties of a wave: one property which varies and the other which remains constant when the wave passes from one medium to another.
Answer:

  1. Wavelength varies
  2. Frequency remains unchanged.

Question 8.
What is meant by the statement ‘the critical angle for diamond is 24° ? How is the critical angle of a material related to its refractive index ?
Answer:
Critical angle for diamond is 24° means that the angle of incidence of light in diamond is such that the angle of refraction for it in air is 90°. The critical angle is related to the refractive index of the material as 1/sin ic = µ, where µ = refractive index

Question 9.
The ray diagram given below illustrates the experimental set up for the determination of the focal length of a converging lens using a plane mirror.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 45.1

(a) State the magnification of the image formed.
(b) Write two characteristics of the image formed.
(c) What name is given to the distance between the object and optical centre in the diagram above ?

Answer:

(a) Magnification of the image formed is of SAME SIZE as that of object.
(b) The image formed is INVERTED and REAL.
(c) Focal length.

2006

Question 10.
An object is placed in front of a convex lens such that the image formed has the same size as that of the object. Draw a ray diagram to illustrate this.
Answer:
When an object is placed at 2F, image is formed at 2F on other side of lens is of same size as of object.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 46

Question 11.
PQ and PR are two light rays emerging from the object P as shown in the figure

(a) What is the special name given to the angle of incidence (∠PQN) of ray PQ ?
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 46.1
(b) Copy the ray diagram and complete it to show the position of the image of the image of the object P when seen obliquely from above.
(c) Name the phenomenon that occurs if the angle of incidence ∠PQN is increased still further.

Answer:

(a) Angle of incidence ∠PQN is Critical Angle
(b) P’ is the image of P as seen obliquely from above.
(c) Total Internal Reflection will take place.

2007

Question 12.
State Snell’s Law of Refraction of light.
Answer:
Snell’s law of refraction states that for a given pair of media and for a given colour of light the ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of angle of refraction is a constant quantity.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 47
The constant is called refractive index of second media with respect to first media.

Question 13.
An object is placed in front of a converging lens at a distance greater than twice the focal length of the lens. Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of the image.
Answer:
The required ray diagram is as shown in the fig. below.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 47.1
A’B’ is the real, inverted and diminished image of the object AB and is formed between F and 2F.

Question 14.
Mention one difference between reflection of light from a plane mirror and total internal reflection of light from a prism.
Answer:
In the case of a plane mirror, the reflection of light incident on the mirror takes place for all angles of incidence. In the case of total internal reflection of the light incident on a prism, the incident ray is first refracted and then suffers total reflection from the other face only, if light is incident at an tingle greater than the critical angle.
Whereas a lot of light energy is absorbed in ordinary reflection, no light is absorbed during total internal reflection.

Question 15.
The diagram given below shows a right-angled prism with a ray of light incident on the side AB. (The critical angle for glass is 42°).
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 48

  1. Copy the diagram and complete the path of the ray of light in and out of the glass prism.
  2. What is the value of the angle of deviation shown by the ray ?

Answer:

  1. The required diagram is as shown in the fig.
  2. The angle of deviation is 90° as shown.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 48.1

Question 16.

  1. With the help of a well-labelled diagram show that the apparent depth of an object, such as a coin, in water is less than its real depth.
  2. How is the refractive index of water related to the real depth and the apparent depth of a column of water ?

Answer:
(i) The labelled diagram is as shown. Coin is placed at position A. It appears at a position B.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 49

2008

Question 17.
(a) (i)A monochromatic beam of light of wavelength X passes from air into a glass block. Write an expression to show the relation between the speed of light in air and the speed of light in glass.
(ii) As the ray of light passes from air to glass, state how the wavelength of light changes. Does it increase, decreases or remain constant ?
(b) Draw a ray diagram to illustrate the determination of the focal length of a convex lens using an auxiliary plane mirror.
Answer:
(a) When a ray of light of wavelength λ passes from air into denser medium speed of light in glass decreases
V = vλ frequency v remains same wave length ‘λ’ decrease
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 49.1
(ii) Wavelength decrease when a ray of light goes from air to glass
(b) On placing lens L on a plane mirror MM’ the pin P is clamped so that its tip is vertically above the centre O of the lens L then height of the pen is adjusted to remove parallax and distance x of the pin from the lens is measured and the distance y of the pin from mirror is measured. The average of the two distances gives the focal length of the lens.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 50

Question 18.
(a) (i) Draw a labelled ray diagram to illustrate (1) critical angle (2) total internal reflection, for a ray of light moving from one medium to another.
(ii) Write a formula to express the relationship between refractive index of the denser medium with respect to rarer medium and its critical angle for that pair of media.
(b) (i) The diagram below shows a ray of light incident on an equilateral glass prism placed in minimum deviation position.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 51
Copy the diagram and complete it to show the path of the refracted ray and the emergent ray.
(ii) How are angle of incidence and angle of emergence related to each other in this position of the prism ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 51.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 52

Question 19.
A linear object is placed on the axis of a lens. An image is formed by refraction in the lens. For all positions of the object on the axis of the lens, the positions of the image are always between the lens and the object

(a) Name the lens.
(b) Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of the image of an object placed in front of the lens at any position of your choice except infinity.

Answer:

(a) As the position of image is always between the lens and the object i.e. on the left of lens it is concave lens.
(b) Object lies anywhere between infinity and optical centre.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 53
The image is formed between F and optical centre is virtual erect and diminished.

Question 20.
Two isosceles right-angled prisms are placed near each other as shown in the figure.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 53.1

Complete the path of the light ray entering the first isosceles right-angled glass prism till it emerges from the second identical prism.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 53.2

2009

Question 21.
(a) A ray of light strikes the surface of a rectangular glass block such that the angle of incidence is (i) 0° (ii) 42°. Sketch a diagram to show the approximate path taken by the ray in each case as it passes through the glass block and emerges from it.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 54
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 54.1

(b) State the conditions required for total internal reflection of light to take place.
Answer:
Conditions required for total internal reflection to take place :

  1. Light must travel from denser to rarer medium.
  2. Angle of incidence in denser medium must be greater than critical angle for the pair of media.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 55

Question 22.
(a) How does the value of angle of deviation produced by a prism change with an increase in the :

  1. value of angle of incidence
  2. wavelength of incident light ?

Answer:

  1. When the angle of incidence increases angle of deviation first decreases till it reaches the value known as minimum deviation position. After that with the increase in angle of incidence angle of deviation also increases.
  2. Angle of deviation decreases with increase in the wavelength of light, so angle of deviation is maximum for violet light and least for red light.

(b) (i) Copy and complete the diagram to show the formation of the image of the subject AB.
(ii) What is the name given to x ?
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 56
Answer:
X is principal focus of concave lens and OX is focal length
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 56.1

(c) (i) The diagram below shows a ray of white light PQ cbming from an object P and incident on the surface of a thick glass plane mirror. Copy the diagram and complete it to show the formation of three images of the object P as formed by the mirror.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 56.2
(ii) Which image will be the brightest image ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 57

2010

Question 23.
(a) (i) What is meant by refraction of light ?
(ii) What is the cause of refraction of light ?
(b) ‘The refractive index of diamond is 2.42 ; What is meant by this statement ?
(c) We can burn a piece of paper by focussing the sun rays by using a particular type of lens.
(i) Name the type of lens used for the above purpose.
(ii) Draw a ray diagram to support your answer.
(d) A ray of light enters a glass slab PQRS, as shown in the diagram. The critical angle of the glass is 42°. Copy this diagram and complete the path of the ray till it emerges from the glass slab Mark the angle in the diagram wherever necessary.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 58
Answer:
(a) (i) Refraction of Light : “When light travels from one optical medium to other optical medium, it changes its path, . this change in path is called refraction of light.”
(ii) The refraction of light takes place because the velocity of light in different media is different.
(b) R.I of diamond is 2.42 this means that velocity of light in diamond is 1/2.42 times the vel. of light in air.
(c) (i) A convex lens is used to focus the sun rays on a piece of paper to burn it. A large amount of heat gets concentrated at a point and is sufficient to burn the piece of paper.
(ii) The necessary ray diagram is given below.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 58.1
(d) The copied diagram alongwith the complete path of the ray is as shown below :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 59
The angle of incidence on PQ is 48° which is greater than the critical angle. Hence, total internal reflection takes place at PQ. OT is the totally reflected ray. It is incident on PS at 42° and will be refracted along TS.

Question 24.
(a) A stick partly immersed in water appears to be bent. Draw a ray diagram to show the bending of the stick when placed in water and viewed obliquely from above.
(b) A ray of monochromatic light is incident from air on a glass slab :

  1. Draw a labelled ray diagram showing the change in the path of the ray till it emerges from the glass slab.
  2. Name the two rays that are parallel to each other. (Hi) Mark the lateral displacement in your diagram.

(c) An erect, magnified and virtual image is formed, when an object is placed between the optical centre and principal focus of a lens.

  1. Name the lens.
  2. Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of the image with the above stated characteristics. (4)

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 60
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 60.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 61

2011

Question 25.
(a) (i) Copy the diagram and complete the path of the ray of light through the glass block. In your diagram, mark the angle of incidence by letter “i” and the angle of emergence by the letter “e”
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 61.1
(ii) How are the angle 7’ and ‘e’ related to each other?
(b) A ray of monochromatic light ente -s a liquid from air as shown in the diagram.
(i) Copy the diagram and show in the diagram the path of the ray of light after it strikes the mirror and reenters the medium of air.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 62
(ii) Mark in your diagram the two angles on the surface of separation when the ray of light moves out from the liquid to air.
(c) (i) When does a ray of light falling on a lens pass through it undeviated ?
(ii) Which lens can produce a real and inverted image of an object ?
(d) (i) How is the refractive index of a medium related to its real depth and apparent depth?
(ii) Which characteristic property of light is responsible for the blue colour of the sky ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 62.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 63

Question 26.
(a) (i) State the laws of refraction of light.
(ii) Write a relation between the angle of incidence (i), angle of emergence (e), angle of prism (A) and angle of deviation (d) for a ray of light passing through an equilateral prism.
(b) An object is placed in front of a lens between its optical centre and the focus and forms an erect, virtual, and diminished image.
(i) Name the lens which formed this image.
(ii) Draw a ray diagram to shows the formation of the image.
Answer:
(a)
(i) Laws of Refraction :
(a) The incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal at the point of incidence, all lie in the same plane.
(b) The ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction is constant for the pair of given media.
(ii) ∠i + ∠e = A + d
(b)
(i) Lens is concave.
(ii) AD is object between focus and optical centre A’D’ is image. The ray diagram is shown.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 64

2012

Question 27.
(a)
(i) Define refractive index of a medium in terms of velocity of light.
(ii) A ray of light moves from a rare medium to a dense medium as shown in the diagram below. Write down the number of the ray which represents the partially reflected ray.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 64.1

(b) You are provided with a printed piece of paper. Using this paper how will you differentiate between a convex lens and a concave lens ?
(c) A ray of light incident at an angle of incidence ‘V passes through an equilateral glass prism such that the refracted ray inside the prism is parallel to its base and emerges from the prism at an angle of emergence ‘e’
(i) How is the angle of emergence ‘e’ related to the angle of incidence ‘i’ ?
(ii) What can you say about the value of the angle of deviation in such a situation ?
Answer:
(a) (i) Refractive index of a medium is the ratio of velocity of light in vacuum or air to the velocity of light in a given medium.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 65
(ii) Ray 2, represents partially reflected ray.
(b) Hold each of the lens 5 cm above the printed paper and look for the image. In case of convex lens the print appears enlarged. However, in case of concave lens, the print appears diminished.
(c) (i) Angle of incidence is equal to the angle of emergence
(ii) The angle of deviation is minimum in this particular case.

Question 28.
(a)
(i) What is meant by the term ‘critical angle’ ?
(ii) How is it related to the refractive index of the medium?
(iii) Does the depth of a tank of water appear to change or remain the same when viewed normally from above ?
(b) A ray of light PQ is incident normally on the hypotenuse of a right angled prism ABC as shown in the diagram given alongside :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 66

(i) Copy the diagram and complete the path of the ray PQ till it emerges from the prism.
(ii) What is the value of the angle of deviation of the ray ?
(iii) Name an instrument where his action of the prism is used.
(c) A converging lens is used to obtain an image of an object placed in front of it.
The inverted image is formed between F2 and 2F2 of the lens.
(i) Where is the object placed ?
(ii) Draw a ray diagram to illustrate the formation of the image.
Answer:
(a) (i) The angle of incidence in a denser medium for which angle of refraction in rarer medium is 90° is called critical angle.
(ii) Refractive index (µ) = 1/sin C
(iii) The depth of tank remains same when viewed normally from above.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 67

2013

Question 29.
(a) A ray of light is moving from a rarer medium to a denser medium and strikes a plane mirror placed at 90° to the direction of the ray as shown in the diagram.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 67.1
(i) Copy the diagram and mark arrows to show the path of the ray of light after it is reflected from the mirror.
(ii) Name the principle you have used to mark the arrows to show the direction of the ray.
(b) (i) The refractive index of glass with respect to air is 1.5. What is the value of the refractive index of air with respect to glass ?
(ii) A ray of light is incident as a normal ray on the surface of separation of two different mediums. What is the value of the angle of incidence in this case ?
(c) (i) Can the absolute refractive index of a medium be less than one ?
(ii) A coin placed at the bottom of a beaker appears to be raised by 4.0 cm. If the refractive index of water is 4/3, find the depth of the water in the beaker.
(d) An object AB is placed between 2F1 and F1 on the principal axis of a convex lens as shown in the diagram.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 68

Copy the diagram and using three rays starting from point A, obtain the image of the object formed by the lens.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 68.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 69

2014

Question 30.
(a) Draw the diagram given below and clearly show the path taken by the emergent ray.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 69.1
(b) (i) A ray of light passes from water to air. How does’ the speed of light change?
(ii) Which colour of light travels fastest in any medium except air? [2]
(c) Name the factors affecting the critical angle for the pair of media.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 70

(b) (i) As the ray of light comes out of water into air (rarer medium) speed of light increases.
(ii) Red colour of light travels fastest in any medium except air.
(c) Factors affecting the critical angle for the pair of media are :
(i) Effect of colour (least for violet, most for red)
(ii) Effect of Temperature i.e. an increasing the temperature of medium, critical angle increases

Question 31.
(a) (i) Light passes through a rectangular glass slab and through a triangular glass prism. In what way does the direction of the two emergent beams differ and why?
(ii) Ranbir claims to have obtained an image twice the size of the object with a concave lens. Is he correct? Give a reason for your answer. [4]
(b) A lens forms an erect, magnified and virtual image of an object.
(i) Name the lens.
(ii) Draw a labelled ray diagram to show the formation of the image.
(c) (i) Define the power of a lens.
(ii) The lens mentioned in 2(b) above is of focal length 25 cm. Calculate the power of the lens.
Answer:
(a) In case of glass slab the refraction takes place at two parallel surfaces. On the first surface, the colours are separated and dispersion takes place.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 71
One the second surface refraction takes place and emergent ray is parallel to the incident ray on the first surface and emergentray appears to be almost white.
In a prism, refraction takes place at two INCLINED surfaces and causes DISPERSION and DEVIATION of light and spectrum is seen.
(ii) No, he is not correct.
With concave lens, image formed is always DIMINISHED
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 72
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 72.1

2015

Question 32.

  1. Name one factor that affects the lateral displacement of light as it passes through a rectangular glass block.
  2. The speed of light in glass is 2 × 150 km/s. What is the refractive index of glass?

Answer:

  1. The thickness of the glass block, angle of incidence and refractive index of glass (any one) are the factors which affect the lateral displacement of light as it passes through a rectangular glass slab.
  2. Given :
    Speed of light in glass = 2 × 105 km/s = 2 × 105 m/s
    Refractive index of glass is
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 73

Question 33.
(a) (i) Where should an object be placed so that a real and inverted image of the same size as the object is obtained using a convex lens ?
(ii) Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of the image as specified in the part a(i).
Answer:
(i) When an object is placed at 2F1 of a convex lens, a real and inverted image of the same size as that of the object is formed at 2F2
(ii) The ray diagram for the same is as shown below :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 73.1
(b) Jatin puts a pencil into a glass container having water and is surprised o see the pencil in a different state. [4]
(i) What change is observed in the appearance of the pencil?
(ii) Name the phenomenon responsible for the change.
(iii) Draw a ray diagram showing how the eye sees the pencil.
Answer:

  1. The pencil appears to be broken at the junction of water, air seperation i.e. it also appears shorter and raised.
  2. The phenomenon responsible for the above observation is the refraction of light and APPARANT DEPTH in passing from water to air.
  3. The ray diagram for the same is as shown below :

2016

Question 34.
(a) A boy uses blue colour of light to find refractive index of glass. He then repeats experiment using red colour of light. Will the refractive index be same or different in the two cases? Give a reason to support your answer.
Answer:
The refractive index will be different in both cases.
Refractive index of glass is different for different colours. The speed of blue light is less than the speed of red light. So, the wavelength of blue light is less than that of red light. Thus, red light would deviate less than blue light because of difference in wavelength.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 74
Copy the diagram given above and complete the path of ray till it emerges out of prism. The critical angle of glass is 42°. In your diagram mark the angles wherever necessary.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 75

(c) State the dependence of angle of deviation :

  1. On refractive index of a material of prism.
  2. On the wavelength of light

Answer:
(i) Angle of deviation is directly proportional to the refractive index of the material of prism. For a given angle of incidence, the prism with higher refractive index produces a greater deviation than the prism which has a lower refractive index. Thus, the angle of deviation increases with an increase in the refractive index of the medium.
(ii) Angle of deviation is inversely propotional to the wavelength of the light used. The angle of deviation decreases with an increase in the wavelength of light. Thus, a prism deviates violet light the most and red light the least.

Question 35.
(a)

  1. Write a relationship between the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction for a given pair of media.
  2. When a ray of light enters from one medium to another medium having different optical densities, it bends, why does this phenomenon occur ?
  3. Write a condition where it does not bend when entering a medium of different optical density.

(b) A lens produces a virtual image between the object and the lens.

  1. Name the lens
  2. Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of image.

Answer:
(i) The ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction is constant for a given pair of media called the refractive index = sin i / sin r = µ
(ii) When a ray of light enters from one medium to another with different optical densities, it bends because there is a change in the speed of light in the two media.
(iii) A ray of light passing from one medium to another does not bend when it is incident normally on the surface.
(b)
(i) The image formed by the lens is virtual and between the object and the lens. Hence, the lens used is a concave lens.
(ii) The following image is of formation of the above image :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light 76

More Resources

Hope given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Refraction Of Light are helpful to complete your science homework.

If you have any doubts, please comment below. APlusTopper try to provide online science tutoring for you.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound

Exercise – 1

Question 1.
(a) State the laws of reflection of sound.
(b) How will you verify laws of reflection of sound experimentally ?
Answer:
(a) Laws of reflection of sound :

  1. Angle of incidence is equal to the angle of reflection. ∠i = ∠l
  2. Incident wave, reflected wave and the normal lie in the same plane.

(b) Verification of laws of reflection : Take a smooth polished large wooden board and mount it vertically on a table. At right angle to the board fix a wooden screen on each side of the screen place a long, narrow and highly polished tube from inside. Place a watch at the end A. Move the tube B slightly left or right till distinct tick of water is heard. Measure ∠PKN and
∠BKN.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 10
It is found that ∠PKN = ∠BKN. This verifies the laws of reflection.

Question 2.
Describe any two applications of reflection of sound.
Answer:
(i) Megaphone : People use horn shaped metal tubes commonly called megaphones while addressing a group of people in fairs or tourist spots. Sound energy is prevented from spreading out by successive reflections from the horn shaped tubes.
(ii) Hearing aid : Its shape is like a trumpet the narrow end is kept in the ear tube of the person who is hard of hearing. Where as the wider end towards the speaker collects the waves and reflects into the narrow end. This increases the intensity of sound energy hence the person who is hard of hearing can hear clearly.

Question 3.
(a) What is an echo ?
Answer:
ECHO : “The repeated sound heard after reflection from a distant rigid obstacle (such as cliff, a hill side, wall of a building, edge of forest etc.) after the original sound has ceased is called an ECHO.”

(b)
State two conditions necessary for the formation of an echo.
Answer:
Two conditions for forming an echo :

  1. The minimum distance between the source of sound and the reflecting body should be 17 metres.
  2. The intensity of sound should be sufficient so that it can be heard after reflection.

Question 4.
What are reverberation ? Give two examples.
Answer:
Reverberation : “Due to repeated reflections at the reflecting surface (reflector is less than 17 metres from original sound) the sound gets prolonged, This effect is known as reverberation.”
Example :

  1. Speaking in a large empty room.
  2. Clapping in tombs like TajMahal.

Question 5.
How will you determine speed of sound by the method of echos ?
Answer:
In order to determine the speed of sound in air, sound produced from a place at known distance d at least 50 m from the reflecting surface. The time interval t in which the echo reaches the place from where sound was produced is noted by a stop watch. Then speed of sound is calculated
as v = total distance travelled /time interval = 2d/ t ms-1

Question 6.
What is sonar ? State its principle. How is it used to find the depth of sea ?
Answer:
SONAR : “Sound Navigation and Ranging.” It is based on the principle of ECHO.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 11

ultra- sonic waves are sent in all directions from the ship and then are received on their return after reflection. Using the formula an obstacle such as enemy submarine, ice berg, a sunken ship etc. The time interval between sending and receiving of wave is noted. The distance (depth) can be calculated by vis speed of ultrasonic waves in water. v = 2d/t or d = Vt/2

Question 7.
How do bats locate their prey ? Explain in detail.
Answer:
Location of prey by bats :
Bats can produce and detect the sound of very high frequency up to 10 kHz. The sound produced by bats get reflected back from an obstacle in front of it. These echoes tell the bat how they must turn in the air to avoid collision with obstacles. By using their ears, the bats, can fly skilfully at night in the utter darkness of caves. The highly sensitive nose of a bat acts as a recorder and picks up air vibrations set in motion by the movements of other animals. It appears that the nose and ears of the bats are important factors in the radar like operation.

Question 8.
How do the following use echoes ?

  1. army,
  2. geologists,
  3. fishermen.

Answer:
(i) army : Echoes are used by army to locate the gun position of enemy. Radar an instrument is used to locate an enemy air-craft ship.
(ii) geologists : Echoes are used by geologists for mineral prospecting.
(iii) fishermen : for locating fishes ultrasonic waves are sent into water. If these vibrations strike a fish, they are reflected back to the receivers. The time for hearing the echoes recorded. The position of fish is calculated by d = v × t/2 using vel. of sound in water as 1450 ms-1.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick ( ✓ ) the most appropriate option.

Question 1.
The practical application based on the reflection of sound is:
(a) megaphone
(b) sounding board
(c) sonometer
(d) both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (b)

Question 2.
Which is not the condition for the formation of echoes ?
(a) Minimum distance between the source of sound and reflecting body should be 17 m.
(b) The temperature of air should be above 20°C.
(c) The wavelength of sound should be less than the height of the reflecting body.
(d) The intensity of sound should be sufficient so that it could be heard after reflection.
Answer:
(a) Minimum distance between the source of sound and reflecting body should be 17 m.

Question 3.
For hearing an echo, the minimum distance between the source of sound and reflecting body should be
(a) 12 m
(b) 24 m
(c) 17 m
(d) 51 m
Answer:
(c) 17m

Question 4.
To locate its prey in the darkness the owl or the bat emits:
(a) infrasonic waves
(b) ultrasonic waves
(c) sonic waves
(d) infrared waves
Answer:
(b) ultrasonic waves

Numericals Problems on Echoes

Practice Problems 1

Question 1.
A person fires a gun in front of a building 167 m away. If the speed of sound is 334 ms-1, calculate time in which he hears an echo.
Answer:
d = 167 ∴ 2d = 167 × 2 m
Speed of sound = 334 ms-1
t for echo to be heard = ?
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 13

Question 2.
An echo is heard after 0.8 s, when a person fires a cracker, 132.8 m from a high building. Calculate the speed of sound.
Answer:
t = 0.8 s d = 132.8 m
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 13.1

Question 3.
The speed of sound is 310 ms-1. A person fires a gun. An echo is heard after 1.5 s. Calculate the distance of person from the cliff from which echo is heard.
Answer:
Speed of sound = 310 ms-1
time after which echo is heard t = 1.5 s distance from cliff d = ?
2d = Speed × t

Practice Problems 2

Question 1.
An echo is heard by a radar in 0.08 s. If velocity of radio waves is 3 × 108 ms-1, how far is the enemy plane ?
Answer:
t = 0.08 s v = 3 × 108 ms-1

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 14.1

Question 2.
An enemy plane is at a distance of 300 km from a radar. In how much lime the radar will be able to detect the plane ? Take velocity of radiowaves as 3 × 108 ms-1.
Answer:
d=300 t = ? v = 3 × 108 ms-1
t=2d/v = 2 × 300 × 1000m/3 ×108 ms-1
=0.002 s = 2 × 10-3 s

Practice Problems 3

Question 1.
A man stands in between two parallel cliffs and explodes a cracker. He hears the first echo after 0.6 s and second echo after 2.4 s. Calculate the distance between the cliffs. [Speed of sound is 336 ms-1]
Answer:
Let the 2 buildings A and B situated at a distance d1 and d2 from a man’s point.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 15

Question 2.
A man stands in between two parallel cliffs and explodes a cracker. He hears the first echo after 0.6 s and second echo after 2.4 s. Calculate the distance between the cliffs. [Speed of sound is 336 ms-1]
Answer:
Let A and B be two cliffs at distance d1 and d2 metre from a man.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 15.1

Practice Problems : 4

Question 1.
A man stands in between two cliffs, such that he is at a distance of 133.6 m from nearer cliff. He fires a gun and hears first echo after 0.8 s and second echo after 1.8 s. Calculate :

  1. speed of sound
  2. distance between two cliffs.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 16

Question 2.
A person stands in between two parallel cliffs which are 99 m apart. He fires a gun and hears two successive echoes after 0.2 s and 0.4 s. Calculate :

  1. the distance of the person from the nearer cliff
  2. speed of sound.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 16.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 17

Practice Problems : 5

Question 1.
A man stands in front of a vertical cliff and fires a gun. He hears an echo after 2.5 s. On moving 80 m closer to the cliff he again fires the gun and he hears an echo after 2 s. Calculate:
(a) distance of man from cliff to his initial position
(b) speed of sound.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 17.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 18

Question 2.
A boy stands in front of a cliff, on the other side of a river. He fires a gun and hears an echo after 6 seconds. The boy then moves 170 m backwards and again fires the gun. He hears an echo after 7 seconds. Calculate :
(a) width of river
(b) speed of sound.
Answer:

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 18.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 19

Exercise – 2

Question 1.
Define the following :

  1. natural vibrations
  2. forced vibrations
  3. damped vibrations
  4. natural frequency

Answer:
(i) Natural vibrations : “The vibrations produced in a body, on being slightly disturbed from its mean position are caiied natural vibrations.”
(ii) Forced vibrations : “The vibrations which lake plat e under the influence of an external periodic force arc called forced vibrations.”
(iii) Damped vibrations : “The periodic vibrations of continuously decreasing amplitude in the presence of resistive force are called damped vibrations.”
(iv) Natural frequency : “The number of vibrations executed per second by a freely vibrating body is called natural frequency.”

Question 2.
State four characteristics of forced vibrations.
Answer:
Characteristics of forced vibrations :

  1. The body acquires the frequency of external periodic force.
  2. The amplitude of forced vibration is very small, if the frequency of external force is much different from natural frequency of the body.
  3. The amplitude of vibration remains constant with time, but magnitude depends upon the frequency of the driving force.
  4. If the frequency of external force is exactly equal or is an integral multiple vibrating body, the amplitude of oscillation is very large.

Question 3.
Give two examples of forced vibrations.
Answer:
Examples:

1. When a guitar is played, the artist forces the strings of the guitar to execute forced vibrations.
2. The vibrations produced in hollow sound box containing air are forced vibrations.

Question 4.
Why are the stringed instruments provided with large wind box?
Answer:
So that on plucking the strings, forced vibrations of the air send greater energy and cause a loud sound.

Question 5.
What do you understand by the term resonance ? Give two conditions for producing resonance.
Answer:
Resonance : “is a special case of forced vibrations. When the frequency of an externally applied periodic force on a body is equal to its natural frequency, the body readily begins to vibrate with an increased amplitude. This phenomenon is called resonance.”
Two conditions of resonance :

  1. The natural frequency of the given body (non-vibrating body) must be equal to (or its integral multiple) the frequency of the vibrating body.
  2. The vibrating body must have sufficient force, so as to. set the other body into vibrations.

Question 6.
Explain the following :
(a) Why does the frame of a motorbike vibrate violently at some particular speed ?
Answer:
The vibrations caused by the movement of the piston, the frame of motorbike may have frequency (natural) be equal to the frequency of piston and due to resonance, it vibrates violently at that particular speed.

(b) Why does an odd piece of cutlery start vibrating violently when a note of some particular frequency is played ?
Answer:
When note of some particular frequency is played its frequency may have matched the natural frequency of odd piece of cutlery and due to resonance the piece starts vibrating.

(c) Why are the soldiers instructed to march out of step while crossing a bridge ?
Answer:
While crossing the bridge when soldiers march in steps, each soldier exerts a periodic force in same phase and therefore the bridge executes the forced vibrations of frequency equal to the frequency of their steps. Now the natural frequency of the bridge happens to be equal to the frequency of the steps, the bridge will vibrate with a large amplitude due to resonance and bridge may collapse. So, the soldiers are advised to break their steps while crossing the bridge.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick ( ✓ ) the most appropriate option.

Question 1.
A string is stretched between two nails fixed in the opposite
walls and plucked from middle. The vibrations produced by the string are : –
(a) forced vibrations
(b) free vibrations
(c) damped vibrations
(d) resonant vibrations
Answer:
(b) free vibrations

Question 2.
Water from a tap is allowed to fall in a vessel with a thin neck. The pitch of sound produced by falling water with the volume of water in the vessel.
(a) decreases
(b) increases
(c) remains same
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) increases

Question 3.
The amplitude of forced vibrations is generally than the amplitude of applied external force.
(a) more
(b) less
(c) equal to
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) less

Question 4.
A tuning fork has a frequency of 212 Hz. It will produce resonance in a wooden board of frequency
(a) 106 Hz
(b) 318 Hz
(c) 212 Hz
(d) 448 Hz
Answer:
(c) 212 Hz

Exercise – 3

Question 1.
Define the following

  1. musical sound,
  2. noise

Answer:
(i) Musical sounds : “Sound waves which produce pleasant sensation in our ears and are acceptable, are called musical sounds.”
(ii) Noise : “Sound waves which produce trouble-some sensation and are unacceptable are known as noise.

Question 2.
Give three differences between musical sound and noise.
Answer:
Difference between musical sound and noise
Musical sound:

  1. Produce pleasant effect on the ear
  2. Proceeds at regular intervals in quick succession.

Noise:

  1. Produce displeasing effect on ear. .
  2. Proceed at irregular intervals.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 23

Question 3.
State three characteristics of musical sound.
Answer:
Three characteristics of musical sound :

  1. Pitch
  2. Loudness or intensity of sound
  3. Quality or timbre.

Question 4.
(a) What do you understand by the term pitch of sound ?
(b) How is the pitch of sound related to the frequency of a vibrating body ?
Answer:
(a) Pitch : “This characteristic enables us to differentiate between two sounds with equal loudness, coming from different sources and having different frequencies.” Sounds with equal loudness can be produced by pressing different keys of the harmonium, but they are easily distinguished due to different pitches.
(b) The higher the frequency of a note the higher is its pitch.

Question 5.
(a) What do you understand by the term loudness of sound ?
(b) How is the loudness of sound related to :

  1. amplitude of the vibrating body,
  2. distance of the observer from the vibrating body,
  3. density of the medium producing sound,
  4. frequency of sound.

Answer:
(a) Loudness : “Is the time rate at which the sound energy flows through a unit area.” Different bodies of same frequency have different loudness due to different amplitude. More the amplitude louder it is.
(b) :

  1. More the amplitude, louder it is.
  2. Loudness or intensity of sound I ∝ 1/(Distance) Loudness decreases with increase in distance.
  3. Loudness is directly proportional to density of medium.
  4. Sound waves of the same Intensity but of different frequencies usually have different loudness.

Question 6.
(a) What do you understand by the term intensity of sound?
(b) Name the unit in which intensity of sound (loudness) is measured.
(c) What is the normal range of loudness ?
(d) What is the range of loudness when sound becomes painful?
Answer:
(a) Intensity of sound or Loudness : “Is the time rate at which the sound energy flows through a unit area.” Different bodies of same frequency have different loudness due to different amplitude. More the amplitude louder it is.
(b) Unit of Intensity of loudness is (dB) decibels.
(c) Normal range of loudness is 50 (dB) to 80 (dB).
(d) above 80 dB it becomes painful.

Question 7.
List one source of noise in :
(a) transportation,
(b) homes,
(c) factories,
(d) surroundings.
Answer:
Source of noise in
(a) Transportation : Petrol and diesel vehicles.
(b) Homes : Power music system, desert cooler.
(c) Factories : Running of machines, grinding.
(d) Surroundings : Loud speakers used in marriages and religious places.

Question 8.
List four harmful effects of sound pollution.
Answer:
Harmful effects of sound pollution :

  1. Noise produces headaches, irritatibility and nervous tension.
  2. A long exposure to noise pollution may result in the loss of hearing to deafness.
  3. Noise in the surroundings interferes with the conversation with another.
  4. It causes anger, tension and interferer with the sleep pattern of individuals.

Question 9.
List four ways of reducing noise pollution.
Answer:
Ways of reducing noise pollution :

  1. Factories should be located far away from residential areas.
  2. Heavy vehicles should not be allowed in residential areas.
  3. At homes T.V. radio, power music system, should played at a low volume.
  4. Machines should be designed in such a way, so that they produce minimum noise.

Question 10.
What do you understand by the term quality of sound ?
Answer:
Quality of sound : “The notes of different instruments having
the same frequencies and same loudness are distinguished by this characteristics.” It is because different waveforms are produced by different musical instruments.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick (✓ ) the most appropriate option.

Question 1.
The amplitude of a sound wave is increased from 1 mm to 2 mm. The loudness of the sound will:
(a) increase two time
(b) increase four times
(c) same
(d) decrease
Answer:
(b) Increase four times ∵ IOC (amp)2

Question 2.
By decreasing the amplitude of a pure note its :
(a) speed decreases
(b) wavelength decreases
(c) quality changes
(d) loudness decreases
Answer:
(d) loudness decreases

Question 3.
Two notes are produced from a flute and piano, such that they have same loudness and same pitch. The notes so produced differ in their :
(a) waveform
(b) wavelength
(c) frequency
(d) speed
Answer:
(a) waveform

Question 4.
The voice of women is shrill as compared to men because of the difference in their :
(a) speed
(b) loudness
(c) frequency
(d) all these
Answer:
(c) frequency

Question 5.
The sound produced by two tuning forks A and B have same amplitude and same waveform, but the frequency of A is three times more than B. In such a case :
(a) quality of sound of A differs from B
(b) the note produced by A is shriller than B
(c) the note produced by B is shriller than A
(d) the note produced by A has more speed than B.
Answer:
(b) the note produced by A is shriller than B

Questions from ICSE Examination Papers

2006

Question 1.
Explain why  musical instruments like a guitar are provided with a hollow box.
Answer:
Hollow box is so constructed that the air column inside it has a natural frequency which is same as that of strings stretched on it. So that when the strings are made to vibrate, the air column inside the box is set into vibrations and its reinforces the sound.

Question 2.
A tuning fork, struck by a rubber pad, is held over a length of air column in a tube. It produces a loud sound for a fixed
length of the air column.
(a) Name the above phenomenon.
(b) How does the frequency of the loud sound compare with that of the tuning fork ?
(c) State the unit for measuring loudness.
Answer:
Phenomenon is resonance
(b) The frequency of the loud sound is increased compared to frequency of tuning fork.
(c) Unit of loudness is decibel dB which signifies sound PRESSURE LEVEL.
ldB = 10 log10 1/10

2007

Question 3.
Define the terms :
(a) Amplitude
(b) Frequency (as applied to sound waves).
Answer:
(a) Amplitude of a wave is the maximum displacement of a particle about its mean position.
(b) Frequency of a wave is defined as the number of vibrations made per second about the mean position. It is measured in Hz.

Question 4.
A man standing in front of a vertical cliff fires a gun. He hears the echo after 3 seconds. On moving closer to the cliff by 82.5 m, he fires again. This time, he hears the echo after 2.5 seconds. Calculate :
(a) the distance of the cliff from the initial position of the man.
(b) the velocity of sound.
Answer:

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 28

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 27

2008

Question 5.
A radar sends a signal to an aeroplane at a distance 45 km away with a speed of 3 × 108 ms-1. After how long is the signal received back from the aeroplane ?
Answer:
As sound comes back so it is echo.
t is calculated by the formula
t = Total distance travelled/Speed = 2d/V
Here d= 45000 m, V = 3 × 108 ms-1 l, t = 2 × 45000 / 3 × 108 = 3 × 10-4 s.

Question 6.
(a) :

  1. What is meant by an echo ? Mention one important condition that is necessary for an echo to be heard distinctly.
  2. Mention one important use of echo.

Answer:

  1. The sound heard after reflection from a rigid obstacle (such as a cliff, a hillside, wall of building, edge of a forest etc.) is called an echo.
    An echo is heard only if the distance between the person producing the sound and the rigid obstacle is long enough to allow the reflected sound to reach the person atleast 0.1 second after the original sound is heard.
  2. Sound ranging and echo depth sounding. Echos are also . used by geologists for mineral prospecting.

(b) :

  1. Sometimes when a vehicle is driven at a particular speed, a rattling sound is heard. Explain briefly, why this happens and give the name of the phenomenon taking place.
  2. Suggest one way by which the rattling sound can be stopped.

Answer:

  1. It happens due to resonance. When a vehicle is driven, the piston of the engine makes in and out motion at a frequency depending upon its speed. The vibrations caused by the movement of piston are transmitted to all parts of the vehicle. It is just possible that some parts of the vehicle (or its frame), may have natural frequency of to and fro movement of piston at the certain speed of the vehicle. When this happens, then at this particular speed of the vehicle that part starts vibrating vigorously due to resonance.
  2. To stop the rattling sound. The speed of vehicle is changed, so that the condition of resonance will not then hold.

2009

Question 7.
An ultrasonic wave is sent from a ship towards the bottom of the sea. It is found that the time interval between the sending and the receiving of the wave, is 1.5 second. Calculate the depth of the sea if the velocity of sound in sea water is 1400 ms’1.
Answer:
t = 1.5 s
s = ?
v = 1400 ms-1
2s = vt
s = vt/2 = 1400 x 1.5/2
= 1050 m

Question 8.
(a) A stringed musical instrument, such as the Sitar, is provided with a number of wires of different thicknesses. Explain the reason for this.
Answer:
In stringed instruments, frequency depends on thickness or radius of string. So to produce different frequencies different strings of different thicknesses are provided.

(b) What is meant by noise pollution ? Write the name of one source of sound that causes noise pollution.
Answer:
The disturbance produced in the environment by undesirable, loud and harsh sound from various sources. Also a constant hearing of sound of level above 120 dB can cause headache and permanent damage to the ears of the listener. This is called noise pollution, e.g., police car siren concert, jet at take off produce noise pollution.

Question 9.
(a) (i) What is the principle on which sonar is based?
(ii) Calculate the minimum distance at which a person should stand in front of a reflecting surface so that he can hear a distinct echo. (Take speed of sound in air = 350 ms-1.)
Answer:

  1. Sonar is based on echo.
  2. The sensation of sound persists in our ears for about 1/10th, of a second after exciting stimulus ceases to act. If d is the distance between the observer and obstancle and v the speed of sound, the time taken to hear the echo is
    t = Distance travelled in going and coming back/speed of Sound of v = 340 ms-1
    ∴ Minimum distance of 17.5 m from the listner, to hear. echo distinctly.

(b) :

  1. Name the characteristic of sound which enables a person to differentiate between two sounds with equal loudness but having different frequencies.
  2. Define the characteristic named by you in (i).
  3. Name the characteristic of sound which enables a person to differentiate between two sounds of the same loudness and frequency but produced by different instruments.

Answer:
Characteristic having

  1. Two sounds with equal loudness but having different frequencies is Pitch.
  2. PITCH : “is that characteric of sound by which an acute (or shrill) not can be distinguished from a grave or flat note.”
  3. Characteristic is quality.

(c) :

  1. A person is tuning his radio set to a particular station. What is the person trying to do to tune it ?
  2. Name the phenomenon involved, in tuning the ratio set.
  3. Define the phenomenon named by you in part (ii).

Answer:

  1. He is trying to match the frequency of the radio components with the brodcasting station he wants to receive and hence to produce resonance (make the sound louder).
  2. Reasonance is the phenomenon.
  3. Resonance “is a special case of forced vibrations. When the frequency of an externally applied periodic force on a body is equal to its natural frequency, the body readily begins to vibrate with an increased amplitude. This phenomenon is known as Resonance.”

2010

Question 10.
(a) State two differences between light waves and sound waves.
(b) The waves of the same pitch have their amplitudes in the ratio 2 : 3.

  1. What will be the ratio of their loudness ?
  2. What will be the ratio of their frequencies ?

(c) Name the subjective property

  1. on sound related to its frequency.
  2. of light related to its wavelength

Answer:
(a) The two main difference are :
Light Waves:

1. They are electromagnetic waves and their velocity is
3 × 1o8 ms-1.
2. They have very small wavelength.

Sound Waves:

1. These are mechanical waves and their velocity is 340 ms-1.
2. The wavelength of sound waves is quite large compared with that of light waves.

(b) :

  1. Since loudness is inversely proportional to the square of the amplitude, I = loudness ∝ 1/(amp)2 therefore loudness will  be in ratio of (2)2 : (3)2 i.e., 4 : 9.
  2. Since their pitch is the same, therefore their frequencies will be same i.e., their ratio is 1 : 1.

(c) :

  1. Loudness
  2. Colour

Question 11.
(a) A man stands at a distance of 68 m from a cliff and fires a gun. After what time interval will he hear the echo, if the speed of sound in air is 340 ms-1.
(b) If the man had been standing at a distance of 12 m from the cliff would he have hear the clear echo ?
Answer:
(a) The time t after which an echo is heard is given by,= 0.07 s which is less than.1 s.

2011

Question 12.
(a) When acoustic resonance takes place, a loud sound is heard. Why does this happen ? Explain.
(b) :

  1. Three musical instruments give notes of the frequencies listed below. Flute : 400 Hz; Guitar : 200 Hz; Trumpet: 500 Hz. Which of these has the highest pitch?
  2. Which of the following frequencies does a tuning fork of 256 Hz resonate ? 288 Hz, 333 Hz, 512 Hz.

Answer:
(a) At acoustic resonance, the amplitude of the vibration of the body becomes very large. Since loudness is proportional to the square of the amplitude, therefore, we hear a loud sound under this condition.
(b) :

  1. Trumpet: 500 Hz.
  2. 512 Hz. Second resonance will take place.

Question 13.
(a) :

  1. Name the type of waves which are used for sound ranging.
  2. Why are these sound waves mentioned in (i) above are not audible to us ?
  3. Give one use of sound ranging.

(b) A man is standing 25 m away from a wall produces a sound and receives the reflected sound.

  1. Calculate the time after which he receives reflected sound ¡f the speed of sound is 350 ms1
  2. Will the man be able to hear a distinct echo ? Give a reason for your answer.

Answer:
(a):

  1. Ultrasonic waves.
  2. Because their frequency lies beyond the limits of audibility (20 Hz—20,000 Hz).
  3. To locate the position of the object under water and to find the depth of sea.

(b):

  1. A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 35
  2. Yes, because distance is more than 17 m and time period is 0.14 sec.

2012

Question 14.
(a) Which characteristic of sound will change, if there is a change in

  1. its amplitude
  2. its waveform.

(b) :

  1. Name one factor which affects the frequency of sound emitted due to vibrations in an air column.
  2. Name the unit used for measuring the sound level.

Answer:
(a) :

  1. With the change in amplitude, the loudness of sound changes.
  2. With the change in waveform the quality of sound changes.

(b) :

  1. The length of vibrating air column affects its frequency. More the length of vibrating air column, lesser is its frequency.
  2. Decibel (dB) is the unit used for measuring sound level.

Question 15.
(a):

  1. What is meant by Resonance ?
  2. State two ways in which Resonance differs from Forced vibrations.

(b):

  1. A man standing between two cliffs produces a sound and hears two successive echoes at intervals of 3 s and 4 s respectively. Calculate the distance between the two cliffs. The speed of sound in the air is 330 ms-1.
  2. Why will an echo not be heard when the distance between the source of sound and the reflecting surface is 10 m?

(c) The diagram below shows the displacement-time graph for a vibrating body.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 36

  1. Name the type of vibrations produced by the vibrating body.
  2. Give one example of a body producing such vibrations.
  3. Why is the amplitude of the wave gradually decreasing?
  4. What will happen to the vibrations of the body after some time ?

Answer:

(a) :

  1. The phenomenon due to which the natural frequency of a given body corresponds to the frequency of sound impressed on it, such that it rapidly starts vibrating is called resonance.
  2. (a). The resonance takes place only when the natural frequency of a given body is equal to the frequency of sound impressed on it, whereas during forced vibration a body is forced to vibrate with the frequency of sound impressed on it.
    (b). Loud sound is produced during resonance, but not in case of forced vibrations.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 37
    Distance between AB = x + y = 495 + 660 = 1155 m
  3. The persistence of sound on ear drum is 1/10 of a second. The echo can be heard if the minimum distance of the source of sound from the vibrating body is 17 m.
    As the distance is only 10 m, therefore, no echo is produced.

(c) :

  1. Transverse vibrations are produced which are gradually damped.
  2. A stretched string of a guitar.
  3. As the energy of wave is dissipated its amplitude decreases.
  4. The body will stop vibrating. It will come to rest.

2013

Question 16.
(a) : A bucket kept under a running tap is getting filled with water. A person sitting at a distance is able to get an idea when the bucket is about to be filled.

  1. What changes take place in the sound to give this idea?
  2. What causes the change in the sound ?

(b): A sound made on the surface of a lake takes 3 s to reach a boatman. How much time will it take to reach a diver inside the water at the same depth ?
[Velocity of sound in air = 330 ms-1 ; Velocity of sound in water = 1450 ms-1]

Answer:

(a):

  1. The sharp pitched sound slowly changes to low pitched sound as the bucket gets filled. The sound almost dies when the bucket is completely filled.
  2. As the length of vibrating air column decreases due to the water, the frequency of the sound changes.

(b) : Distance covered by the sound to reach boatman = 330 ms-1 × 3 s = 990 m
∴Distance of diver from the source of sound = 990 m 990 m 990 _
∴Time taken by the sound to reach diver = 1450 ms-1 ” 145 s = 0.68 s (Appox.).

Question 17.
(a) :

  1. What is the principle on which SONAR is based.
  2. An observer stands at a certain distance away from a cliff and produces a loud sound. He hears the echo of the sound after 1.8 s. Calculate the distance between the cliff and the observer if the velocity of sound in air is 340 ms-1.

(b) : A vibrating tuning fork is placed over the mouth of a burette filled with water: The tap of the burette is opened and the water level gradually starts falling. It is found that the sound from the tuning fork becomes very loud for a particular length of the water column.

  1. Name the phenomenon taking place when this happens.
  2. Why does the sound become very loud for this length of the water column ?

(c) :

  1. What is meant by the terms (a) amplitude (b) frequency of a wave ?
  2. Explain why stringed musical instruments, like the guitar, are provided with a hollow box.

Answer:

(a) :

  1. SONAR is based on Echo of Sound.
  2. Distance between cliff and source of sound
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 39

(b) :

  1. The phenomenon is called ‘resonance of sound’.
  2. A some particular length of air column the natural frequency of air column corresponds the frequency of tuning fork. At this moment the sound waves reinforce to produce loud sound.

(c) 

  1. The maximum displacement of vibrating particle about its mean position is called its amplitude. The number of waves which pass through a point in a medium in one second is called frequency.
  2. Stringed musical instruments are provided with hollow box so that when the vibrations are produced by strings are impressed on the enclosed air, they produced forced vibrations and a loud sound is produced.

2014

Question 18.
(a) :

  1. What are mechanical waves ?
  2. Name one property of waves that do not change when the wave passes from one medium to another.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 40
The diagram above shows three different modes of vibrations P, Q and R of the same string.

  1. Which vibrations will produce a louder sound and why?
  2. The sound of which vibration will have maximum shrillness?
  3. State the ratio of wavelengths P and R.

Answer:
(a) :

  1. Mechanical Waves : “Sound waves which require medium to travel are called Mechanical Waves.”
  2. Frequency of wave does not change as it passes from one medium to other medium.

(b) :

  1. R will produce louder sound because its amplitude is more than P and Q.
  2. The sound of P string will have maximum
  3. The ratio of wavelength of P and R is lp/lR = fR/fp = 1/3  ∴ lp : lR = 1 : 3

Question 19.
(a) : A type of electromagnetic wave has wavelength 50A.

  1. Name the wave.
  2. What is the speed of this wave in vacuum?
  3. State one use of this type of wave.

(b) :

  1. State one important property of waves used for echo depth sounding.
  2. A radar sends a signal to an aircraft at a distance of 30 km away and receives it back after 2 x 10-4 second. What is the speed of the signal?

Answer:
(a) : 

  1. X-Ray.
  2. 3 x 108 m/s.
  3. X-Ray are used for detection of fracture in bones.

(b) :

  1. The depth of sea can be found by echo depth sounding process and waves used are ULTRA SONIC and these can travel un deviated through a long distance, can be confiued to narrow beam and are not absorbed by medium.
  2. Distance of aircraft = 30 km = 30 x 1000 m = 30,000 m Total distance = 2 x 30,000 = 60,000 m Time taken = 2 x 10-4 second
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 41

2015

Question 20.

  1. Draw a graph between displacement and the time for a body executing free vibrations.
  2. Where can a body execute free vibrations?

Answer:

  1. The displacement—time graph for a body executing free vibrations is given below:
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 42
  2. The free vibrations of a body actually occur only in vacuum because the presence of a medium offers some resistance due to which the amplitude of vibration does not remain constant and decreases continuously. Thus, we define free vibrations as the periodic vibrations of a body of constant amplitude in the absence of any external force on it.

(b) :

  1. State the safe limit of sound level in terms of decibel for human hearing.
  2. Name the characteristic of sound in relation to its waveform.

Answer:

  1. The safe limit of sound level for human hearing is 60 dB to 85 dB.
  2. The characteristic of sound in relation to its waveform is quality or timbre.

Question 21.

(a) : A person standing between two vertical cliffs and 480 m from the nearest cliff shouts. He hears the first echo after 3s and the second echo 2s later. Calculate:

  1. The speed of sound.
  2. The distance of the other cliff from the person.

Answer:

  1. Let d1 be the distance of the nearest cliff and d2 be the distance of the farther cliff. The time for the first echo is t1 = 3 s The first echo will be heard from the nearest cliff. The total distance travelled by sound before reaching the person is 2d1
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 43
    Hence, the speed of sound is 320 m/s.
  2. The second echo is heard 2 s after the first one. Hence, t2 = 3 + 2 = 5 s Again the sound travels a total distance 2d2 before reaching the person. So, we get
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 43.1
    Hence, the distance between the other cliff and the person is 800 m.

(b) : In the diagram below, A, B, C, D are four pendulums suspended from the same elastic string PQ. The length of A and C are equal to each other while the length of pendulum B is smaller than that of D. Pendulum A is set in to a mode of vibrations.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 44

  1. Name the type of vibrations taking place in pendulums B and D?
  2. What is the state of pendulum C?
  3. State the reason for the type of vibrations in pendulums B and C.

Answer:

  1. The vibrations which occur in pendulums B and D are called forced vibrations.
  2. Pendulum C is in the state of resonance with pendulum A as it is of the same length.
  3. The pendulums vibrate because the forced vibration from A is transferred due to string PQ.
    Pendulum B is of a different length as compared to pendulum A. Hence, it will continuously vibrate with a frequency which is different from that of pendulum A. Its amplitude will also be very small. Pendulum C is of the same length as compared to pendulum A. Hence, it will vibrate in phase with pendulum A. Its amplitude will be equal to that of pendulum A as it will attain resonance.

2016

Question 22.
(a) : The ratio of amplitude of two waves is 3:4. What is the ratio of their :

  1. loudness
  2. frequencies?

Answer:

  1. Let a1 and a2 be the amplitudes and I, and I2 be the intensities of the two waves.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 45
  2. Frequency is the number of waves formed per second. It only depends on time period. Thus, the ratio of their frequencies is 1:1.

(b) : State two ways by which the frequency of transverse vibrations of a stretch string can be increases.
Answer:
The frequency of transverse vibration is given by
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Sound 45.1
where l = length of the vibrating string
T = tension in the string
m = mass per unit length of the string
Therefore, the frequency of transverse vibration of a stretched string can be increased by

  1. decreasing the length of the string
  2. decreasing the radius of the string
  3. increasing the tension T in the string

(c) : What is meant by noise pollution? Name one source of sound causing noise pollution.
Answer:
The disturbance produced in the environment by undesirable and loud sound from the various sources is called noise pollution. Loudspeaker, noise produced by heavy duty vehicles or railways trains, etc.

Question 23.
(a) :

  1. Name the waves used for echo depth sounding.
  2. Give one reason for their use for the above purpose.
  3. Why are the waves mentioned by you not audible to us?

Answer:

  1. (i) The waves used for echo depth sounding are ultrasound waves.
    (ii) Ultrasound waves are used for echo depth ranging because they can travel undeviated through a long distance.
    (iii) Ultrasonic waves have frequency larger than 20000 Hz. Hence, these waves are not audible to us as the audible range for the human ear is 20 Hz to 20000 Hz.

(b) :

  1. What is an echo
  2. State two conditions for an echo to take place.

Answer:

  1. The sound heard after reflection from a distant obstacle after the original sound has ceased is called an echo,
  2. The conditions for an echo to take place are
    a. The minimum distance between the source of sound and the reflector in air must be 17 m.
    b. The size of the reflector must be large enough as compared to the wavelength of sound wave.

(c) :

  1. Name the phenomenon involved in tuning a radio set to a particular station.
  2. Define the phenomenon named by you in part (i) above.
  3. What do you understand by loudness of sound ?
  4. In which units is the loudness of sound measured ?

Answer:

  1. The phenomenon involved in tuning a radio set to a particular station is called resonance.
  2. Resonance : When the frequency of an externally applied periodic force on a body is equal to its natural frequency, the body readily begins to vibrate with an increased amplitude. This phenomenon is known as resonance.
  3. Loudness is the property by virtue of which a loud sound can be distinguished from a faint one, both having the same pitch and quality.
  4. The loudness of sound is measured in decibel (dB).

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry

These Solutions are part of A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions. Here we have given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry

Exercise – 1

Question 1.
Define calorie.
Answer:
CALORIE : “Is the amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of 1 g of water from 14.5 °C to 15.5°C”.

Question 2.
State the modern unit of heat energy. How is this unit related to calorie ?
Answer:
Modern unit of heat energy is joule
Relation of joule with calorie :
1 J = 2.4 calorie
or 1 calorie = 4 .186 J = 4.2 J (approx)

Question 3.
What do you understand by the term thermal capacity ? State its unit is SI system.
Answer:
Thermal capacity : “The amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of a given mass of substance through 1°C (1k) is called thermal capacity”.

Question 4.
Define specific heat capacity and state its SI and CGS units.
Answer:
Specific heat capacity : “Is the amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of unit mass of a substance through 1°C or 1K is called specific heat capacity.”
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 3

Question 5.
Is the specific heat capacity of ice greater, equal to or less than water ?
Answer:
Specific heat capacity of ice is less than specific heat capacity of water.

Question 6.
Explain the following :

(a) Water is used in hot water bottles for fomentation purposes.
Answer:
Water provides heat energy for longer time and does not cool quickly as specific heat capacity of water is large.

(b) Water is used as a coolant in motor car radiators.
Answer:
When water is circulated in the pipes, it absorbs more amount of heat from surroundings (removes heat) without much rise in its temperature because of its high specific heat capacity.

(c) A wise farmer always waters his fields in the evening, if there is a forecast for frost.
Answer:
To save the crops on such cold nights farmers fill their fields with water as water has high sp. heat capacity. So water does not allow the temp, in the surrounding area of plants to fall upto 0°C. Other wise when temp, falls below 0°C water in the fine capillaries of plants will freeze, so the veins will burst due to increase in volume of water on freezing.

(d) Wet soil does not get as hot as dry soil in the sun.
Answer:
Water has high sp. heat capacity as compared to soil (dry) and absorbs heat from surrounding for longer time and takes longer time to set as compared to dry soil.

(e) Water is sprinkled on the roads in the evening during hot summer.
Answer:
Water has high sp. heat capacity and removes heat from the hot soil and decreases its temperature during hot summer evening.

(f) Water is used for internal heating in cold countries.
Answer:
In cold countries water is used for internal heating as it can carry large amount of heat energy from the furnace to the rooms at a fairly moderate temperature.

(g) Cold water is poured on the burns caused on the skin by some hot object.
Answer:
Water has high sp. heat capacity and can remove more heat from the bums caused on the skin by hot object and releives of the pain.

(h) Water rubs are kept in warehouses storing fruits and vegetables in cold countries during winter.
Answer:
Water has high sp. heat capacity and water kept in tubs lose heat for a longer time and keep the surrounding hot for longer time and save the vegetables from busting due to increase in volume at low temp, of water present vegetables.

Question 7.
Explain how is land breeze caused ?
Answer:
Land breeze : Blowing of cold air from land towards sea. During night temp, of land falls more rapidly as compared to water. Since water has high sp. heat capacity Pressure over sea water decrease and hence air blows from land (high pressure) towards sea (low pressure)

Question 8.
Explain the formation of sea breeze.
Answer:
Sea breeze : Blowing of cool air from sea towards land. During day time land gets heated up rapidly due to low sp. heat of land as compared to water. Pressure at land decreases. Hence air blows from sea (high pressure) towards land (low pressure).

Question 9.
Why is the weather in coastal regions moderate ?
Answer:
The climate near coastal regions moderate : The sp. heat capacity of water is very high or sp. heat capacity of land is much low as compared to water. As such land (or sand) gets cooled more rapidly as compared to water under similar conditions. Thus, a large difference in temperature is developed between the land and the sea, due to which cold air blows from land towards sea during night (i.e. land breeze) and during the day cold air blows from sea towards land (i.e. sand breeze). These make the climate near coastal region moderate.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick (✓) the most appropriate option.

1. The specific heat capacity of a substance :
(a) changes with the mass of given substance.
(b) changes with the area or volume of substance.
(c) changes with rise or fall in temperature.
(d) is a constant quantity for a given substance.
Answer:
(d) is a constant quantity for a given substance.

2. Land and sea breezes are formed in coastal regions because :
(a) water has very high specific heat capacity than the land.
(b) land has very high specific heat capacity than the water.
(c) sea water cools the cooler regions. .
(d) all the above.
Answer:
(a) water has very high specific heat capacity than the land.

3. The base of cooking pans is made thicker and heavy because:
(a) it lowers the heat capacity of pan
(b) it increases the heat capacity of pan
(c) the food does not get charred and keeps hot for long time
(d) both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (c)

4. The S.I. unit of specific heat capacity is :
(a) JKg-1
(b) JK-1
(c) JKg-1 K-1
(d) kJkg-1 K-1
Answer:
(b) Jk-1

5. The specific heat capacity of water in S.I. system is :
(a) 4.2 Jkg-1 K-1
(b) 42 JKg-1 K-1
(c) 4200 JKg-1 k-1
(d) 420 JKg-1 K-1
Answer:
(c) 4200 JKg-1 K-1

6. S.I. unit of thermal capacity is :
(a) Jkg-1
(b) kJ Kg-1
(c) Jkg-1 K-1
(d) cal oC-1
Answer:
(c) Jkg-1 K-1

Numerical Problems on Specific Heat Capacity

Practice Problems 1

Question 1.
A solid of mass 0.15 kg is heated from 10°C to 90°C. If the specific heat capacity of the solid is 390 Jkg-10 C-1, find the heat absorbed by the solid.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 6
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 7

Question 2.
A liquid of mass 0.2 kg and temperature 135°C is cooled to 25°C. If the specific heat capacity of liquid is 750 Jkg-10 C-1, find the heat energy given out.
Hint : OF = (135 – 25) = 110°C
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 7.1

Practice Problems 2

Question 1.
0.08 kg of a substance is heated from 30°C to 130°C when 2000 calories of energy is supplied to it Calculate the specific heat capacity of the substance in (a) calories, (b) joules.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 7.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 8

Question 2.
0.50 kg of lead at 327°C is cooled to 27°C, when it gives off 22500 calories of energy. Calculate the specific heat 1 capacity of lead in (a) calories, (b) joules.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 8.1

Practice Problems 3 

Question 1.
272 calories of heat is required to heat 0.02 kg of a metal of specific heat capacity 170 cal kg-10 C-1 to a temperature T. If the initial temperature of the metal is 20°C, calculate the final temperature T.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 8.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 9

Question 2.
3.75 × 105 calories of heat is given out by 5 kg of water at 100°C. Calculate the temperature of cooled water. Specific heat capacity of water is 1000 cal kg-1 °C-1.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 9.1

Question 3.
A burner, supplies heat energy at a rate of 20 Js-1 Find the specific heat capacity of a solid of mass 25 g, if its temperature rises by 80°C in one minute.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 9.2

Question 4.
A liquid of mass 100 g loses heat at a rate of 200 Js-1 for 1 minute. If the temperature of liquid drops by 100°C, calculate the specific heat capacity of the liquid.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 10
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 10.1

Practice Problems 4

Question 1.
A heater, rated 1000 W, is used to heat 1.5 kg of water at 40°C to its boiling point. Calculate the time in which the water starts to boil Specific heat capacity of water is 4200. J kg-10 C-1.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 10.2

Question 2.
400 g of mercury of specific heat capacity 0.14 Jg-1 °C-1 is heated by a 200 W heater for 1 min. and 40 s. If initially mercury is at 0°C, calculate its final temperature.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 10.3
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 11

Question 3.
A power drill of 400 W makes a hole in a lead cube of specific heat capacity 0.13 Jg-1  °C-1 in 80 s. If the temperature of lead rises from 27°C to 327°C, calculate the mass of the lead cube.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 11.1

Practice Problems 5

Question 1.
A solid of mass 150 g at 200°C is placed in 0.4 kg of water at 20°C till a constant temperature is attained. If the S.H.C. of the solid is 0.5 Jg-1 K-1, find the resulting temperature of the mixture.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 11.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 12

Question 2.
A liquid of mass 100 g at 120°C is poured in water at 20°C, when the final temperature recorded is 40°C. If the specific heat capacity of the liquid is 0.8 Jg-1 °C-1, calculate the initial mass of water.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 12.1

Question 3.
A solid of mass 50 g at 150°C is placed in 100 g of water at 11°C, when the final temperature recorded is 20°C. Find the specific heat capacity of the solid.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 12.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 13

Practice Problems 6

Question 1.
20 g of hot water at 80°C is poured into 60 g of cold water, when the temperature of cold water rises by 20°C. Calculate the initial temperature of cold water.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 13.1

Question 2.
50 g of a hot solid of specific heat capacity 0.25 Jg-10 C-1 and at 100°C is placed in 80 g of cold water, when the temperature of cold water rises by 3°C. Find the initial temperature of cold water.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 13.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 14

Practice Problems 7

Question 1.
What mass of a solid of specific heat capacity 0.75 Jg-10 C-1 will have heat capacity 93.75 Jg-1 °C-1 ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 14.1

Question 2.
A solid of mass 1.2 kg has sp. heat capacity of 1.4 Jg-1 °C-1. Calculate its heat capacity in SI units.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 14.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 15

Practice Problems 8

Question 1.
A solid of mass 0.15 kg and at 100°C is placed in 0.25 kg of water, contained in a copper calorimeter of mass 0. 12 kg at 10°C. If the final temperature of the mixture is 20°C, calculate the sp. heat capacity of the solid.
(given, H.C of water = 4200 Jkg-1 k-1, SHC of copper = 400 J Kg-1 k-1)
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 15.1

Question 2.
A piece of brass of mass 200 g and 100°C, is placed in 400 g of turpentine oil, contained in a copper calorimeter of mass 50 g at 15°C. The final temperature recorded is 23CC. Find the sp. heat capacity of turpentine oil.
[SHC for brass = 370 J kg-1 k-1 ; SCH of copper = 390 J Kg-1 k-1 ]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 16
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 16.1

Practice Problems 9

Question 1.
A copper vessel contains 200 g of water at 24°C. When 112 g of water at 42°C is added, the resultant temperature of water is 30°C. Calculate the thermal capacity of the calorimeter.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 17

 

Question 2.
A copper calorimeter contains 50 g of water at 16°C. When 40 g of water at 36°C is added, the resulting temperature of the mixture is 24°C. Calculate the heat capacity of the calorimeter.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 17.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 18

Practice Problems 10

Question 1.
A liquid X of specific heat capacity 1050 J kg-1 K-1 and at 90°C is mixed with a liquid Y of specific heat capacity 2362,5 J kg-1 K-1 and 20°C, when the final temperature recorded is 50°C. Find in what proportion the weights of the liquids are mixed.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 18.1

Question 2.
Your are required to make a water bath of 50 kg at 45°C, by mixing hot water at 90°C, with cold water at 20°C. Calculate the amount of hot water required.
Hint : Let amt. of hot water = x
Amount of cold water = (50 – x) kg
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 18.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 19

Practice Problems 11

Question 1.
Heat energy is given to 100 g of water, such that its temperature rises by 10 K. When the same heat energy is given to a liquid L of mass 50 g its temperature rises by 50 K. Calculate

  1. heat energy given to water
  2. the specific heat capacity of liquid L.

[Take sp. heat capacity of water = 4200 J Kg-1 k-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 19.1

Question 2.
Heat energy is given to 80 g of alcohol (sp. heat capacity 2200 J kg-1 K-1) when its temperature rises by 20 K. If the same heat energy is given to 200 g of mercury of sp. heat capacity 140 J kg-1 K-1, what is the rise in temperature.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 20

Practice Problems 12

Question 1.
A copper ball is dropped from a vertical height of 1200 m. If the initial temperature of copper ball at the height is 12°C, what is its temperature of copper is 400 Jkg-1 °C-1 and g = 10 ms-2.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 20.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 21

Question 2.
A waterfall is 1.5 km high. If the temperature of water at its top is 20°C find its temperature at the bottom of waterfall, assuming all the kinetic energy is converted into heat energy.
[Take g – 10 ms-2 and sp. heat capacity of water = 4200 J Kg-1 c-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 21.1

Exercise – 2

Question 1.
(a) What do you understand by the term latent heat of fusion?
Answer:
Latent heat of fusion : When a solid is heated change in phase from solid to liquid takes place at a constant temp. “The heat supplied to change solid to liquid at constant temp, is called latent heat of fusion.”

(b) Why does the temperature remain constant during the fusion of a substance ?
Answer:
“The heat absorbed by solid is utilised in increasing the potential energy of the molecules.”

Question 2.
What do you understand by the term specific latent heat of fusion ? State its C.GS. and S.I. unit.
Answer:
Specific latent heat of fusion : “The heat energy required to convert unit mass of the substance from solid to liquid state without change in temperature.”
Units :
C.G.S. → Cal g-1
S.I. J kg-1

Question 3.
Define specific latent heat of fusion of ice. State its magnitude in calories and joules.
Answer:
Specific latent heat of fusion of ice : “Is the heat energy required to convert unit mass of ice to water without the change in temp, (or ice at 0°C to water at 0°C).”
Specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 cal g-1 or 336000 Jkg-1

Question 4.
The specific heat of fusion of lead is 27 Jg-1. What do you understand from the statement ?
Answer:
The specific latent heat of lead is 27 Jg-1 means 1 g of lead will absorb 27 J of heat in changing from solid to liquid at constant temperature.

Question 5.
Why should bits of ice to wiped dry before adding them to the calorimeter during the determination of specific latent heat of fusion of ice ?
Answer:
If bits of ice are not wiped dry waterdrops are already in liquid state will absorb less heat and result will not be correct.

Question 6.
Explain the following :

(a) Why does the weather become moderate in cold countries when the freezing of lakes and other water bodies start ?
(b) Why does it become very cold when ice starts melting in the cold countries ?
(c) Why is melting of ice a better coolant than water at zero degree Celsius ?
(d) Why does ice-cream feel more colder than water at 0°C ?
(e) Why does the weather become warm, when it snows ?
(f) Why does the weather become very cold after a hail storm ?
(g) Why are icebergs carried thousands of kilometers away without melting substantially ?
(h) Why does snow/ice not melt rapidly on the mountains during summer ?

Answer:
Reasons used : 1 kg of ice on meting absorbs 336000 J of heat energy and 1 kg of water to freeze will absorb 336000 J of heat energy.
(a) When freezing of lakes and other water bodies start in cold countries every 1 kg of water gives out 336000 J of heat and temp, of atmosphere increase making the weather moderate.
(b) When ice start meting heat is absorbed from the atmosphere (336000 J for every 1 kg of ice) and temp, falls in the surrounding and it becomes very cold.
(c) Sp. Latent heat of ice is 336000 J for every 1 kg ice. Hence to change ice at 0°C to water at 0°C, it will extract 336000 J of heat from the hot engine and will cool the engine for longer time.
(d) Sp. latent heat of ice is very high and it is 336000 J Hence ice will absorb more heat from mouth and temp, of mouth will fall considerably and ice cream feels more colder than water.
(e) When it snows, water evolves heat i.e. it gives out 336000 J for every 1 kg, in the surrounding and it becomes warm.
(f) After hail storm, to melt ice balls very large amount of heat is extracted from surroundings (sp. heat capacity of ice 336000 J) hence temp, falls and it becomes very cold.
(g) Specific latent heat of ice and also density of ice (less than water) makes it flow in water and ice bergs lose heat slowly and are carried to large distance.
(h) It is the high latent heat of ice (336000 J) for every 1 kg to change into under at 0°C. Snow melts slowly on the mountains in summer and water is available in the rivers.

PQ. (a) What do you understand by the term greenhouse effect ?
(b) Name the two main greenhouse gases and how they enter the atmosphere.
Answer:
(a) Green house effect : Sun rays from the Sun pass the earth’s atmosphere and infrared radiations of short wave length reach the earth’s surface and objects (plants) on it. They get warmed during day time. At night the same earth’s At mosphere becomes opaque i.e. does not allow infra-red radiations of long wavelength to go back. In other words atmosphere entraps (or long wavelengths are absorbed by green house gases like CO2 methane, chlorofluorocarbons) and hence atmosphere acts as green house with glass walls and raises the temp, inside. Hence green house effect “is the phenomenon in which infrared radiations of long wavelength given out from the surface of earth are absorbed by its atmospheric gases to keep the environment at the earth’s surface and its lower atmosphere warm”.
(b) Two main green house gases are :

  1. Carbon dioxide CO2
  2. Methane gas CH4

CO2 enters the atmosphere through

  1. Fossil fuel based power plants
  2. Deforestation
  3. Internal combustion engines.
  4. Increasing population and their activities.

Methane (CH4) enters the atmosphere when dead vegetable matter decays. It is mainly produced due to the decaying dead plant remains in the paddy fields.
It is also produced in marshly lands, sewage, coal mines and bio gas plants.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick (✓) the most appropriate option.

1. The amount of heat energy required to melt a given mass of a substance at its melting point without any rise in temperature is called :
(a) heat capacity
(b) sp. heat capacity
(c) latent heat of fusion
(d) sp. latent heat of fusion
Answer:
(c) latent heat of fusion

2. The SI unit of specific latent heat is :
(a) Jg-1
(b) cal g-1
(c) J kg-1
(d) J kg-1 K-1
Answer:
(c) J kg-1

3. The sepcific latent heat of fusion of ice in SI system is :
(a) 80 cal g-1
(b) 336 × 103 J kg-1
(c) 2260 × 103 J kg-1
(d) 336 J kg-1
Answer:
(b) 336 × 103 J kg-1

4. Global warming will result in :
(a) increase in agricultural production
(b) decrease in the level of sea water
(c) decrease in disease caused by bacteria
(d) increase in the level of sea water
Answer:
(d) increase in the level of sea water

5. Which is not a greenhouse gas :
(a) methane
(b) ozone
(c) carbon dioxide
(d) chlorofluorocarbons
Answer:
(b) ozone

6. With the increase in carbon dioxide in the atmosphere the acidity of oceans will :
(a) decrease
(b) remain unaffected
(c) increase
(d) none of these
Answer:
(d) none of these

Practice Problems 1

Question 1.
4000 calories of heat energy is supplied to crushed ice at 0°C, such that it completely melts to form water at 0°C. If sp. latent heat of fusion of ice is 80 cal g-1, what is the mass of ice ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 26

Question 2.
A solid of mass 80 g and at 80°C melts completely to form liquid at 80°C by absorbing 640 J of heat energy. What is the sp. latent heat of fusion of solid ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 26.1

Practice Problems 2

Question 1.
100 g of ice at -10°C is heated on a gas stove till it forms water at 80°C. Calculate :

  1. Heat energy required to bring the ice to 0°C.
  2. Heat energy required to melt the ice
  3. Heat energy required to bring water to 80°C.

[Sp. heat capacity of ice = 2 J g-1 °C-1, Sp. heat capacity of water = 4.2 J g-1 °C-1, and Sp. heat capacity of liquid wax = 1.8 J g-1 °C-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 27

Question 2.
400 g of wax at 10°C is heated to 80°C, when it starts melting. On complete melting wax is further heated so that temperature rises to 130°C. Calculate
(a) Heat energy required to bring the wax to its melting point
(b) Heat energy required to melt the wax
(c) Heat energy required to bring the molten wax to 130° C.
[Sp. heat capacity of solid wax = 1.5 J g-1 °C-1, Sp. heat capacity of liquid wax = 1.8 Jg-1 °C-1 and Sp. latent heat of wax = 80 J g-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 27.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 28

Practice Problems 3

Question 1.
A solid initially at 0°C is heated. The graph shows variation in temperature with the amount of heat energy supplied. If the specific heat capacity of solid 0.8 Jg10 °C-1, from the graph, calculate (a) the mass of solid and (b) specific latent heat offusion of solid.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 28.1
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 28.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 29

Question 2.
A solid initially at 60°C is heated. The graph shows variation in temperature with the amount of heat energy supplied. If the specific heat capacity of solid is 1.2 Jg1 °C-1, from the graph, calculate (i) the mass of solid and (ii) specific latent heat offusion of solid.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 29.1
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 30

Practice Problems 4

Question 1.
Water at 80°C is poured into a bucket containing 1.5 kg of crushed ice at 0°C, such that all the ice melts and the final temperature records is 0°C. Calculate the amount of hot water added to the ice.
[Take sp. H.C. of water 4200 J g-1 °C-1 and sp. latent heat of ice = 336 × 103 J kg-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 30.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 31

Question 2.
1.6 kg of boiling water at 100°C is poured into 2 kg of crushed ice at [336 × 103 J kg-1]0 °C, such that final temperature recorded is 0°C. Calculate the specific heat of ice.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 31.1

Practice Problems 5

Question 1.
40 g of ice at – 10° C is heated by a heater of power 250 W, such that water formed from it, attains the temp, equal to the boiling point of water. For how long is the heater switched on?
[Sp. h.c. of ice = 2 Jg-1 °C-1 ; Sp. latent heat of ice = 340 Jg-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 31.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 32

Question 2.
An immersion heater is placed in crushed ice at – 40°C, contained in a perpex jar, such that water at 50°C is formed. If the power of heater is 200 W and it is switched on for 3 min. and 20s. Calculate the initial mass of ice S.H.C. of ice – 2.1 Jg-1 °C-1 and latent heat of ice = 336 Jg-1
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 32.1

Question 3.
A burner supplies heat energy at a rate of 434 JS-1 for 60 seconds when 40 g of ice at 0°C changes to water at 75°C. Calculate latent heat of ice.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 33
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 33.1

Practice Problems 6

Question 1.
A vessel of mass 80 g (S.H.C. =0.8 Jg-1 °C-1) contains 250 g of water at 35°C. Calculate the amount of ice at 0°C, which must be added to it, so that final temperature is 5°C.
[Sp. latent heat of ice = 340 Jg-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 33.2

Question 2.
A vessel of mass 100 g (S.H.C. = 0.2 cal g-1 °C-1] contains 500 g of water at 37°C. Calculate the amount of ice, which should be added to the vessel, so that the final temperature is 17°C.
[S.H.C. of water = 1 cal g-1 °C-1 and S.L.H. of ice = 80 cal g-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 33.3
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 34

Question 3.
10g of ice at 0°C is added to 10g of water at 80°C, such that the temperature of mixture is 0°C. Calculate the sp. latent heat of ice.
[S.H.C. of water = 4.2 Jg-1 °C-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 34.1

Practice Problems 7

Question 1.
A metal ball of mass 0.5 kg and at 900°C is placed on a block of ice, till it attains the temperature of ice. If the S.H.C. of metal ball is 850 J kg-1 K-1, calculate the amount of ice, which melts. Take S.L.H of ice 34 × 104 J kg-1.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 34.2

Question 2.
Calculate the temperature of a furnace, when a 400 g of copper ball, taken out from it, melts only 400 g of ice to form water at 0°C. Take S.H.C. of copper = 0.4 Jg-1 °C-1 and S.L.H. of ice = 336 Jg-1
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 35

Question 3.
A metal ball of 0.20 kg and at 200°C, when placed on an ice block melts 100 g of ice, when its temp, stops falling. If sp. latent heat of ice is 340 Jg-1. Calculate specific heat capacity of metal ball
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 35.1

Practice Problems 8

Question 1.
A 30 watt immersion heater just keeps 600 g of molten metal at its melting point. The heater is switched off and the temperature starts falling after 6 min. Calculate sp. latent heat of fusion of the metal
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 35.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 36

Question 2.
A hydrocarbon of mass 1.5 kg is just kept in molten state by a heater of 500 W. If the heater is switched off, the temperature starts dropping after 4 mins. Calculate sp. latent heat of fusion of hydrocarbon.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 36.1

Practice Problems 9

Question 1.
500 g of water at 60°C is contained in a vessel of negligible heat capacity. Into this water is added 400 g of ice at 0°C. Calculate the amount of ice which does not melt.
[Take SHC of water = 4.2 J g-1 °C-1 and SLH of ice = 336 Jg-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 36.2

Question 2.
2 kg of water at 100° is contained in a vessel of negligible heat capacity. Into this water is added 3 kg of ice at 0°C. Calculate the amount of water at 0°C at the end of experiment.
[Take SHC of water = 4.2 J g-1 °C-1 and SLH of ice = 336 × 103 J]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 37

Practice Problems 10

Question 1.
A vessel with a negligible heat capacity contains 1000 g ice at 0°C. Into it is poured 100 g of water at 100°C. What would be the result at the end of experiment ?
[Take SHC of water = 4.2 J g-1 °C-1 and SLH of ice = 336 Jg-1 ]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 37.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 38

Question 2.
What will be the result whn 400 g of copper clips at 500°C with 800 g of crushed ice at 0°C ?
[ Sp. heat capacity of copper = 0.42 J g-1 K-1, Sp. latent heat of fusion of ice = 340 J g-1 ]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 38.1

Questions from ICSE Examination papers

2006

Question 1.
Give two reasons as to why copper Le preferred over other metals for making calorimeters.
Answer:

  1. Copper is very good conductor of heat and has low sp. heat capacity 0.093 cal. g-1 °C-1 to attain the temp. of contents soon
  2. The low sp. heat capacity and heat cner taken by calorimeter from its content to acquire the temp, of its contents is negligible.

Question 2.
Calculate the amount of heat released when 5.0 g of water at 20°C is changed to ice at 0°C.
(Specific heat capacity of water = 4.2 Jg-1 °C-1)
[ Sp. latent heat of fusion of ice = 336 J g-1 ]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 39

Question 3.
A piece of iron of mass 2 kg has a thermal capacity of 966 J°C-1.

(a) How much heat is needed to warm it by 15°C ?
(b) What is its specific heat capacity in S.I. units ?
(c) What is the principle calorimetry ?

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 39.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 40

Question 4.
Explain why water is used in hot water bottles for fomentation and also as a universal coolant.
Answer:
For specific heat capacity of water being very high i.e. 4200 J Kg-1 k-1, water extracts more heat from hot surrounding and loses it very slowly and acts as effective coolant.

2007

Question 5.
Some hot water was added to three times the mass of cold water at 10°C and the resulting temperature was found to be 20°C. What was the temperature of the hot water ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 40.1

Question 6.
(a) (i) What is meant by Specific heat capacity of a substance ?
(ii) Why does the heat supplied to substance during its change of state not cause any rise in its temperature? (3)
(b) A substance is in the form of a solid at 0°C. The amount of heat added to this substance and the temperature of the substance are plotted on the following graph :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 41
If the specific heat capacity of the solid substance is 500J/kg°C, find from the graph :

  1. the mass of the substance
  2. the specific latent heat of fusion of the substance in the liquid state.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 41.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 41.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 42

2008

Question 7.
In what way will the temperature of water at the bottom of a waterfall be different from the temperature at the top ? Give a reason for your answer.
Answer:
Stored water has potential energy. On falling potential energy of water get converted into kinetic energy and ultimately into heat energy. So water at the bottom will have slightly high temperature as compared to top.

Question 8.
A certain quantity of ice at 0°C is heated till it changes into steam at 100°C. Draw a time-temperature heating curve to represent it. Label the two phase changes in your graph.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 42.1

Question 9.

  1. Define heat capacity of a given body. What is its SI unit?
  2. What is the relation between heat capacity and specific heat capacity of a substance ?

Answer:

  1. The heat capacity of a body is the amount of heat energy required to rise its temperature by 1°C or IK. SI unit J °C-1 or JK-1
  2. Heat Capacity = Mass specific heat capacity

Question 10.
A piece of ice of mass 40 g is dropped into 200 g of water at 50°C.
Calculate the final temperature of water after all the ice has melted.
(specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J/kg °C, specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 336 × 103 J/kg)
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 43

2009

Question 11.
(a) Why do pieces of ice added to a drink cool it much faster than ice cold water added to it ?
Answer:
Ice absorbs 336 J/g heat energy extra from the drink as compared to ice cold water. So it cools the drink much faster.

(b) 40g of water at 60°C is poured into a vessel containing 50g of water at 20° C. The final temperature recorded is 30°C. Calculate the thermal capacity of the vessel.
(Take specific heat capacity of water as 4.2 Jg-1 °C-1 ).
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 43.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 44

Question 12.
(a) State in brief, the meaning of each of the following:

  1. The heat capacity of a body is 50 J °C-1.
  2. The specfic latent heat of fusion of ice is 336000 J kg-1.
  3. The specific heat capacity of copper is 0.4 J g1 °C-1.

Answer:

  1. The heat capacity of the body is 50 J °C-1 means the body will absorb 50 J of heat energy to raise its temp by 1 °C
  2. The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 336000 J kg-1 means to melt 1 kg of ice at 0°C to 1 kg water at 0 °C it will absorb 336000 J of heat energy.
  3. The specific heat capacity of copper is 0.4 Jg-1 °C-1 means 1 g of copper will absorb 0.4 J of heat energy to raise its temp, by 1°C.

(b) (i) What is the principle of the method of mixtures ?,(ii) Name the law on which this principle is based.
Answer:

  1. When there is no loss or gain of heat from surroundings, heat lost by hot body or bodies is equal to heat gained by cold body or bodies.
  2. It is based on the law of conservation of energy.

(c) Calculate the amount of ice which is required to cool 150 g of water contained in a vessel of mass 100 g at 30°C, such that the final temperature of the mixture is 5°C. (Take specific heat capacity of material of vessel as 0. 4 Jg-1 °C-1, specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 336 Jg-1, specific heat capacity of water – 4.2 J g-1 °C-1.)
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 44.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 45

2010

Question 13.
(a) (i) Define the term ‘specific latent heat of fusion of a substance.
(ii) Name the liquid which has the highest specific heat capacity.
(iii) Name two factors on which the heat absorbed or given out by a body depends.
(b) (i) An equal quantity of heat is supplied to two substances A and B. The substance A shows a greater rise in temperature. What can you say about the heat capacity of A as compared to that of B ?
(ii) What energy change would you expect to take place in the molecules of a substance when it undergoes
1. a change in its temperature ?
2. a change in its state without any change in its temperature?
(c) 50 g of ice at 0°C is added to 300g of a liquid at 30°C. What will be the final temperature of the mixture when all the ice has melted ? The specific heat capacity of the liquid as 2.65 J g-1 °C-1 while that of water is 4.2 J g-1 °C-1. Specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 336 J g-1.
Answer:
(a) (i) Specific latent heat of fusion : It is defined as the heat required to melt one kilogram of a substance at its melting point without any change in temperature.
(ii) Water has the highest specific heat capacity.
(iii) The heat absorbed or given out by a substance depends upon (i) mass of the body, (ii) rise or fall of temperature
(b) (i) Heat absorbed by a substance is given by
H = ms θ
H = Heat capacity × rise of temperature.
Since, H is same for both A and B, it is a clear that heat capacity is inversely proportional to the rise of temperature.
Since, the rise of temperature A is more its heat capacity must be less.
∴ Heat capacity of A is less than that of B.
1. The energy of the molecules of a body increases with the rise in temperature and decreases with the fall of temperature.
2. Since, temperature remains constant there is no change in the kinetic energy of the molecules. The energy given to substance to change the state of the substances increases potential energy of the molecules.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 46
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 47

2011

Question 14.
(a) (i) Differentiate between heat and temperature. (ii) Define Calorimetry. (2)
(b) 200 g of hot water at 80°C is added to 300 g of cold water at 10°C. Calculate the final temperature of the water. Consider the heat taken by the container to by negligible, [specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J kg-1 °C-1]
Answer:
(a) (i)
Heat :

  1. Heat is the energy of transit.
  2. Its S.I. unit is Joule.
  3. It is the measured by the principle of Calorimetry.
  4. It is an addictive quantity.

Temperature :

  1. Temperature is the fundamental quantity which determines the direction of flow of heat.
  2. Its S.I. unit is Kelvin.
  3. It is measured by Thermometer.
  4. It is not an addictive quantity.

(ii) Calorimetery : The measurement of the quantity of heat is called Callorimetery.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 48

Question 15.
(a) (i) Explain why the weather becomes very cold after a hailstorm.
(ii) What happens to the heat supplied to a substance when the heat supplied causes no change in the temperature of the substance ? (3)
(b) (i) When 1 g of ice at 0 °C melts to form 1 g of water at 0 °C then, is the latent heat absorbed by the ice or given out by the ice ?
(ii) Give one example where high specific heat capacity of water is used as a heat reservoir.
(iii) Give one example where high specific heat capacity of water is used for cooling purposes. (3)
(c) 250 g of water at 30°C is present in a copper vessel of mass 50 g. Calculate the mass of ice required to bring down the temperature of the‘ vessel and its contents to 5°C.
Specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 336 × 103 J kg-1
Specific heat capacity of copper vessel = 400 J kg-1 °C-1
Specific heat capacity of water = 336 × 103 J kg-1 °C-1 (4)
Answer:
(a) (i) As the ice starts melting after a hailstorm, it absorbs latent heat of fusion from the surrounding air. This leads to the cooling of atmosphere.
(ii) Heat supplied to a substance during its change of state is called latent heat. It is used up in increasing the potential energy of the molecules of the substance and in doing work against external pressure if there is an increase in volume. Hence there is no change of temperature.
(b) (i) Water at 0°C has more heat than ice at 0°C. This is because each gram of ice absorbs nearly 336 J of heat when it melts into water at 0°C.
(ii) In cold countries water is used as heat reservoir for wine and juice bottle to avoid freezing. Due to high specific heat capacity imports a large amount of heat before reaching to the freezing temp. Hence bottles kept in water remains warm and do not freeze.
(iii) It is used as coolant by flowing it in pipes around the heated part of machines.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 49
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 50

2012

Question 16.
(a) Differentiate between heat capacity and specific heat capacity
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 50.1

(b) A hot solid of mass 60 g at 100°C is placed in 150 g of water at 20°C. The final steady temperature recorded is 25°C. Calculate the specific heat capacity of the solid.
[Specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J kg-1 °C-1 ]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 50.2

Question 17.
(a) (i) Write an expression for the heat energy liberated by a hot body.
(ii) Some heat is provided to a body to raise its temperature by 25°C.
What will be the corresponding rise in temperature of the body as shown on the kelvin scale ?
(iii) What happens to the average kinetic energy of the molecules as ice melts at 0°C ?
(b) A piece of ice at 0°C is heated at a constant rate and its temperature recorded at regular intervals till steam is formed at 100°C. Draw a temperature – time graph to represent the change in phase. Label the different parts of your graph. [3]
(c) 40 g of ice at 0°C is used to bring down the temperature of a certain mass of water at 60°C to 10°C. Find the mass of water used.
[ Specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J kg-1 °C-1 ]
[ Specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 336 × 103 J kg-1] [4]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 51
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 52

2013

Question 18.
(a) Define the term ‘Heat capacity’ and state its S.I. unit
(b) How much heat energy is released when 5 g of water at 20°C changes to ice at 0° C?
[Specific heat capacity of water = 4.2 Jg-1 °C-1 ; Specific latent heat of fusion of ice – 336 g-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 52.1

Question 19.
(a) (i) It is observed that the temperature of the surrounding starts falling when the ice in a frozen lake starts melting. Give a reason for the observation.
(ii) How is the heat capacity of the body related to its specific heat capacity ?
(b) (i) Why does a bottle of soft drink cool faster when surrounded by ice cubes than by ice cold water, both at 0° C ?
(ii) A certain amount of heat Q will warm 1 g of material X by 3°C and 1 g of material Y by 4°C. Which material has a higher specific heat capacity.
(c) A calorimeter of mass 50 g and specific heat capacity 0.42 J g-1 °C-1 contains some mass of water at 20°C. A metal piece of mass 20 g at 100 °C is dropped into the calorimeter. After stirring, the final temperature of the mixture is found to be 22°C. Find the mass of water used in the calorimeter.
[specific heat capacity of the metal piece = 0.3 Jg-1 °C-1]
[ specific heat capacity of water = 4.2 Jg-1 °C-1 ] (4)
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 53
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 54

2014

Question 20.
50 g of metal piece at 27 °C requires 2400 J of heat energy so as to attain a temperature of327 °C. Calculate the specific heat capacity of the metal.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 54.1

Question 21.
(a) Heat energy is supplied at a constant rate to 100g of ice at 0 °C. The ice is converted into water at 0 °C in 2 minutes. How much time will be required to raise the temperature of water from 0 °C to 20 °C ?
[Given : sp. heat capacity of water – 4.2 J g-1 °C-1] sp. latent heat of ice = 336 J g-1. [4]
(b) Specific heat capacity of substance A is 3.8 J g-1 K-1 ] whereas the Specific heat capacity of substance B is 0.4 J g-1 K-1.

  1. Which of the two is a good conductor of heat?
  2. How is one led to the above conclusion?
  3. If substances A and B are liquids then which one would be more useful in car radiators?

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 54.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 55

2015

Question 22.
(a) Rishi is surprised when he sees water boiling at 115 °C in a container. Give reasons as to why water can boil at the above temperature. [2]
Answer:
The water boils at the higher temperature because of the reasons given below :

  1. The water used by Rishi might be impure. The boiling of a liquid increases with the addition of impurities.
  2. Rishi might have used a container which creates a pressure within. The boiling point of a liquid increases with an increase in pressure.

(b) Which property of water makes it an effective coolant?
Answer:
The high specific heat capacity of water makes it an effective coolant.

Question 23.
(a)

  1. Water in lakes and ponds do not freeze at once in cold countries. Give a reason is support of your answer.
  2. What is the principle of Calorimetry?
  3. Name the law on which this principle is based.
  4. State the effect of an increase of impurities on the melting point of ice.

Answer:

  1. The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is sufficiently high (=336 J g-1), and so to freeze water, a large quantity of heat has to be withdrawn. Hence, it freezes slowly and thus keeps the surroundings moderate.
  2. Principle of calorimetry : If no heat energy is exchanged with the surroundings, i.e. if the system is fully insulated, then the heat energy lost by the hot body is equal to the heat energy gained by the cold body.
  3. The principle of calorimetry is based on the law of conservation of energy.
  4. Increasing the impurities causes the melting point of ice to decrease.

(b) A refrigerator converts 100 g of water at 20°C to ice at – 10°C in 35 minutes.
Calculate the average rate of heat extraction in terms of watts.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 56

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 56.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 57

2016

Question 24.
(a) Calculate the mass of ice required to lower the tempera-ture of 300 g of water at 40°C to water 0°C.
[Specific latent heat of ice = 336 J, Specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 Jg-1 °C-1]
(b) What do you understand by the following statements :
(i) The heat capacity of water is 60 JK-1.
(ii) The specific heat capacity of lead is 130 Jkg-1 K-1.
(c) State two factors on which heat absorbed by a body depends.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 60
(b) (i) Heat capacity is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of a body by 1°C or 1 K. Thus, 60 JK-1 of energy is required to raise the temperature of the given body by 1 K.
(ii) Specific heat capacity is the amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of unit mass of a substance through 1 °C or IK. Thus, 130 J Kg-1 K-1 of heat energy required to raise the temperature of unit mass of lead through 1 K.
(c) Heat absorbed by a body is directly proportional to :

  1. its mass
  2. Rise in temperature
  3. Specific heat capacity

Question 25.
(a)

  1. What is the principle of methods of mixtures ?
  2. What is the other name given to it ?
  3. Name the law on which this principle is based.

Answer:

  1. The principle of method of mixture says that the heat lost by a hot body is equal to the heat gained by a cold body.
  2. The other name given to the principle of mixture is the principle of calorimetry.
  3. The principle of mixture is based on the law of conservation of energy.

(b) Some ice is heated at a constant rate and its temperature is recorded after every few seconds, till steam is formed at 100°C. Draw the temperature-time graph to represent the change. Label two phase changes in the graph.
Answer:
The figure for phase change is shown below :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 58

(c) A copper vessel of mass 100 g contains 150 g of water at 50°C. How much ice is needed to cool it to 5°C ?
Given : Sp. heat capacity of copper = 0.4 J g-10 C-1
Sp. heat capacity of water = 4.2 Jg-10 C-1
Sp. latent heat of fusion of ice 336 Jg-10 C-1
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry 59

More Resources

Hope given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Calorimetry  are helpful to complete your science homework.

If you have any doubts, please comment below. APlusTopper try to provide online science tutoring for you.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines

These Solutions are part of A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions. Here we have given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines

Exercise – 1

Question 1.
(a) What is a machine ?
(b) State three functions of machine.
Answer:
(a) Machine : “Is a device which is used to transmit force to change the direction of force or to obtain speed.”
(b) Functions of machines :

  1. To act as force multiplier
  2. To shift the point of application to a convenient place.
  3. To multiply speed.
  4. To change the direction of the force applied for greater ease and comfort.

Question 2.

(a) Name six simple machines.
(b) Give one practical example of each machine named in (a)

Answer:
(a) Simple machines are :

  1. Lever
  2. Pulley
  3. Wedge
  4. Inclined plane
  5. Wheel and axle
  6. Screw

(b) Example of :

  1. Liver : is handle of common water pump helps in multiplying effort
  2. Pulley : gears, used for changing the direction of the effort
  3. Wedge : axe, A knife are the examples.
  4. Inclined plane : Ramp or staircase or screw jack.
  5. Wheel and axle : Free wheel or crank wheel of bicycle.
  6. Screw : Screw bolt.

Question 3.
Define the following terms with reference to a machine

(a) Total load
(b) useful load
(c) effort
(d) ideal machine
(e) ideal mechanical advantage
(f) actual mechanical advantage
(g) velocity ratio
(h) efficiency

Answer:
(a) Total load : Load lifted by machine + resistance over come.
(b) Useful load : “The load, a machine in able to lift.”
(c) Effort : The effort applied by us on the machine.
(d) Ideal machine : A machine whose parts are weightless and frictionless such that what so ever is the energy spent on it same is the energy produced by it, is called a perfect machine.”
(e) Ideal mechanical advantage : “The ratio between total load moved (or resistance overcome) to the effort applied is called ideal mechanical advantage.”
(f) Actual mechanical advantage : “The ratio between useful load moved to the effort applied is called actual mechanical advantage”.
(g) Velocity ratio : [V.R.] : “Is the ratio of velocity of effort to velocity of load.”
i. e “Ratio of effort arm to load arm.”
(h) Efficiency : (η) “Efficiency of a machine is the ratio of useful work done by machine to the work put into the machine by the effort.”

Question 4.
Prove that efficiency of a machine is the ratio between mechanical advantage and velocity ratio.
Answer:
Relation Between M.A., V.R And Efficiency :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 5
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 6

Question 5.
Give two reasons, why machine cannot be 100% efficient.
Answer:

  1. Apart of input is always used in moving the parts of machine.
  2. A part of input is wasted in overcoming friction between various parts of machine.

Question 6.
(a) Define lever. What are its kinds ?
(b) How will you determine the order of a lever ?
Answer:
(a) Lever : “Is a straight or bent rigid rod which can turn about a fixed point called fulcrum”
(b) Out of effort (E), Load (L) and Fulcrum (F), the one which is in between the other two determines the order of lever i.e.
If F is in between L and E, then it is lever of 1 st order
If L is in between F and E. It is of second order lever.
If E is in between L and F, it is Illrd order lever.

Question 7.
To which order do the following levers belong and why ?

(a) A railway signal
(b) A man cutting bread with a knife
(c) A boy writing a piece of paper
(d) A nut cracker
(e) handle of a water pump
(f) see-saw
(g) forceps
(h) A man rowing a boat
(i) A lock and key
(j) Soda water opener
(k) a door
(l) motorcarfoot brake
(m) fishing rod
(n) lemon squeezer.

Answer:
(a) A railway signals – Lever of 1st order as F is in between load and effort
(b) Cutting a bread with knife is third order lever as effort is in between load and fulcrum.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 7
(c) A boy writing a piece of paper is Illrd order lever as effort is in between load and fulcrum.
(d) A nut cracker is II nd order lever as load is in between effort and fulcrum.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 7.1

(e) Handle of water pump : 1st order lever as fulcrum is in between effort and load
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 7.2
(f) See-saw : Lever of 1st order as fulcrum is in between load and effort
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 8
(g) Forceps : Illrd order lever as effort is in between fulcrum and load.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 8.1
(h) A man rowing a boat : End order of lever as load is in between effort and fulcrum
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 8.2
(i) Bottle Opener : Ilnd order lever as load is in between fulcrum and effort.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 8.3
(j) Soda – water opener : 2nd order lever as load is in between fulcrum and effort.
(k) A door : Ilnd order lever as load is in between effort and fulcrum.
(l) Motorcar foot brake : 3 rd order lever as effort is in between load and fulcrum.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 9
(m) A fishing rod : 3 rd order lever as effort is in between fulcrum and load.
(n) Lemon squeezer : 2 nd class lever as load is in between fulcrum and effort.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 9.1

Question 8.
Why does a lever of second order have mechanical advantage more than one ?
Answer:
M.A. of second order of lever is more than one as effort arm is longer than load arm M.A = Effort arm / Load arm

Question 9.
Why does a lever of third order have a mechanical advantage less than 1 ?
Answer:
M.A. of Illrd order lever is always less than 1 as effort arm is less than load arm M.A. = Effort arm / Load arm

Question 10.
In which situation does the lever of first order have mechanical advantage (a) more than 1 (b) less than 1 ?
Answer:

(a) Mechanical advantage can be more than 1 when effort arm is larger than load arm or by moving the fulcrum towards the load.
(b) M.A. can be less than lwhen effort arm is smaller than load arm or by moving fulcrum towards effort.

Question 11.
Why are cutting edges of pliers smaller than the cutting edges of scissors ?
Answer:
Cutting edges of pliers are smaller to make it force multiplier. Load arm is kept very small because the resistance (load) of the metal is very large and to over come this resistance the effort arm is made larger.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick ( ✓ ) the most appropriate option.

1. Which of the statement is not true for a machine ?
(a) It can multiply force
(b) It can increase speed
(c) It can change the direction of applied force.
(d) Its output can be more than input.
Answer:
(d) Its output can be more than input.

2. Which of the statement is not true for an actual machine?
(a) Its mechanical advantage is less than velocity ratio.
(b) Its efficiency is always less than 100%
(c) Its mechanical advantage is greater than velocity ratio.
(d) Output of machine is always less than input.
Answer:
(c) Its mechanical advantage is greater than velocity ratio.

3. A lever which always has mechanical advantage less than 1 has :
(a) Load between effort and the fulcrum.
(b) Effort between the load and the fulcrum.
(c) Fulcrum between the load and effort.
(d) Effort and load act at same point.
Answer:
(b) Effort between the load and the fulcrum.

4. The correct relationship between the effort (E) load (L) and mechanical advantage (M.A.) is :
(a) M.A. = L × E
(b) M.A. × E = L
(c) M.A. x L= E
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) M.A. × E = L

5. The correct relationship between the velocity ratio (V.R) the distance through which effort act (d) and the distance through which load moves (D)
(a) V.R. × D = d
(b) V.R. = D × d
(c) V.R. × d = D
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) V.R. × D = d

6. The correct relationship between the efficiency (η), mechanical advantage (M.A.) and velocity ratio (V.R.) of an actual machine is :
(a) η = M.A × V.R
(b) η = M.A. ÷ V.R.
(c) η × V.R. = M.A.
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(c) η × V.R. = M.A.

7. A fire tong is a lever of :
(a) First order
(b) Second order
(c) Third order
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) Third order

8. A person standing vertically upon his toes is an example of lever of :
(a) First order
(b) Second order
(c) Third order
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) Third order

9. A lever which always have mechanical advantage more than 1 is :
(a) Lever of first order
(b) Lever of second order
(c) Lever of third order
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) Lever of second order

10. A lever which can have mechanical advantage either less than one or more than one depending upon the position of fulcrum is a lever of :
(a) First order
(b) Second order
(c) Third order
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) First order

Numerical Problems on Levers

Practice Problems 1 

Question 1.
In operating a water pump, a resistance of 480 N is overcome by an effort of 72 N. If the distance of the fulcrum from the point where the resistance act is 0.2 m. Find the distance from the fulcrum where effort is applied.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 12

Question 2.
A uniform plank of a see-saw is 5m long and supported at its centre. A boy weighing 40 kgf sits at a distance 1.5 m from one end of the see-saw where must a girl weighing 25 kgf sit on the other end of the see-saw so as to balance the boy ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 12.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 13

Practice Problems 2 

Question 1.
The handle of a nutcracker is 16 cm long and a nut is placed 2 cm from its hinge. If a force of 4 kgf is applied at the end of the handle to crack it, what weight, if simply, placed on the nut will crack it ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 13.1

Question 2.
An effort of 50 kgf is applied at the end of a lever of the second order, which supports a load of 750 kgf, such that the load is at a distance of 0.1 m from the hinge. Find the length of the lever. (Assume that the lever is weightless)
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 14

Practice Problems 3 

Question 1.
A machine displaces a load of 125 kgf through a distance 0. 30 m, when an effort of 12.5 kgf acts through a distance of 4.0 m. Calculate the

(a) velocity ratio
(b) mechanical advantage
(c) % age efficiency of the machine.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 14.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 15

Question 2.
Calculate the (a) velocity ratio (b) mechanical advantage (c) %age efficiency of a machine which overcomes a resistance of 800 N through a distance of 0.12 m, when an effort of 160 N acts through a distance of 0.72 m.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 15.1

Practice Problems 4 

Question 1.
An effort of 500 N is applied through a distance of 0.50 m on a machine, whose efficiency is 90% such that resistance is overcome through a distance of 0.04 nuCalculate the (a) V.R. (b) M.A. (c) resistance overcome by the machine.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 16
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 16.1

Question 2.
A crow-bar of length 2.0 m is used as a machine, to lift a box of 100 kgf by placing a fulcrum at a distance of 0.1 m from the box Calculate the (a) V.R (b) effort required. What assumption has been made by you in solving the problem ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 16.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 17

Practice Problems 5

Question 1.
The handle of a water pump is 90 cm long from its piston rod. If the pivot of handle is at a distance of 15 cm from the piston rod, calculate :
(a) mechanical advantage of handle
(b) least effort required at its other end to overcome a resistance of 60 kgf.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 17.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 18

Question 2.
A crowbar of length 2.5 m is pivoted at a point 25 cm from its tip. Calculate (i) mechanical advantage of crowbar (ii) the maximum load displaced by it by applying an effort of 100 kgf on its extreme end.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 18.1

Practice Problems 6

Question 1.
A walnut can be broken by applying a direct force of 50 kgf. If the walnut is placed in a nut crackers, the length of whose handle is 18 cm and nut is placed 2 cm from the pivot, calculate the minimum force required to crack the nut.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 19

Question 2.
A key is 5 cm long the turns the levers of a lock at a distance 1 cm. If the lock is opened by an effort of 10 N, calculate the resistance offered by the levers of the lock.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 19.1

Practice Problems 7

Question 1.
A door is 1 m wide. It can be closed by an effort of 25 N, when effort is applied at a distance of 0.4 m from the hinge. What effort is needed, if it is applied at its extreme end ?
Answer:
E × Effort arm
25 N × 0.4 m
∵ work done in both cases is same
Now effort EN × 1 m = 10
E= 10/1 = 10N

Question 2.
A nut can be opened by a lever of length 0.25 m by applying a force of 80 N. What should be the length of lever, if a force of 32 N is enough to open the nut ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 20

Exercise – 2

Question 1.
What is a pulley ?
Answer:
Pulley : “is a flat circular disc, having a groove in its edge and capable of rotating about a fixed point passing through its centre commonly called axle.”

Question 2.
Mechanical advantage of a single fixed pulley is always less than 1. Why is the pulley commonly used ?
Answer:
The effort can be applied in a more convenient direction with the single fixed pulley.
One can conveniently make use of his own weight also for the effort.

Question 3.
Draw a diagram of a single movable pulley system. Why is this system preferred to a single fixed pulley system ?
Answer:
Single movable pulley : The single movable pulley is preferred to a single fixed pulley because load can be lifted by applying an effort equal to half the load (in ideal situation) i.e. the pulley acts as a force multiplier.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 21

Question 4.
Draw diagram of pulley system having velocity ratio (a) six (b) three
Answer:
(a) Six pulleys L = 6T
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 21.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 22
Velocity Ratio (V.R.) : In a system of n pulley if the load moves up through a distance d, the effort end moves through a distance because each segment of the string supporting the load is loosened by a length d i.e. dL = d then dE = nd
∴ Velocity ratio = nd/d = n
Thus the V.R. is always equal to the number of strands of tackle (or section of the string) supporting the load.

Question 5.
How can a single pulley be used as a single movable pulley ? Explain or draw a labelled diagram.
Answer:
Single movable pulley : “A pulley whose axis of rotation-is movable (not fixed in position) is a movable pulley done in Q.3.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick (✓) the most appropriate option.

1. A single fixed pulley is used because :
(a) its efficiency is 100%
(b) it multiplies effort
(c) it multiplies speed
(d) it changes the direction of applied effort
Answer:
(d) it changes the direction of applied effort

2. The actual mechanical advantage of a single movable pulley is :
(a) one
(b) two
(c) less than 2, but more than 1
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) less than 2, but more than 1

3. A sheaf pulley system has :
(a) efficiency more than 100%
(b) multiplies speed
(c) multiplies effort
(d) both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(c) multiplies effort

4. A pulley system has 5 pulley in all. Its velocity ratio is :
(a) 5
(b) less than 5
(c) more than 5
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) 5

5. A single movable pulley has :
(a) velocity ratio 2, and actual mechanical advantage 2
(b) velocity ratio 2, and actual mechanical advantage less than 2
(c) velocity ratio 2, and actual mechanical advantage more than 2
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) velocity ratio 2, and actual mechanical advantage less than 2

6. An actual pulley system always has mechanical advantage less than velocity ratio. It is because :
(a) a part of effort is wasted in overcoming friction.
(b) a part of effort is wasted in overcoming load of movable block
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) both (a) and (b)

Numerical Problems on Pulleys

Practice Problems 1

Question 1.
A pulley system has five pulley in all and is 90% efficient. Calculate

(a) the mechanical advantage
(b) the effort required to lift a load of1000 N
(c) the resistance due to the movable parts of the machine and friction.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 24
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 25

Question 2.
Diagram shows a single movable pulley system.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 25.1

(a) Mark the direction of force due to tension.
(b) What is the purpose of the fixed pulley ?
(c) If T is the tension in newtons, what is the relation between T and E ?
(d) Calculate VR of the system.
(e) Assuming efficiency is 100%, what is the mechanical advantage ?
(f) Calculate the effort E.

Answer:
(a) Force due to tension is shown.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 26
(b) Purpose of fixed pulley:
(i) If effort is applied only in upward direction it is inconvenient. With the single fixed pulley B to change the direction of force is shown.
(ii) More over one can use his own weight also at effort as it will be quite convenient.
(c) T = E
(d) V.R = distance moved by effort / distance moved by load
V.R. = 2d/d = 2
∵ When free end of string is pulled up by the effort through 2d, then load is raised up through a distance d.
(e) M.A. / V.R. = η
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 27

Practice Problems 2

Question 1.
Diagram alongside show a pulley system when a load of 30 kgf is attached to a movable block.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 27.1

(a) What is the velocity ratio of pulley system ?
(b) What is the mechanical adyantage of pulley system assuming it is ideal ?
(c) What is the magnitude of effort applied ?
(d) If the pulley system is not ideal and is 60% efficient, what is the effort required ?

Answer:
L = 3 kgf
If free end of string is pulled up by the effort through 3d, then the load is raised up through a distance d
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 28

Question 2.
A pulley system has five pulleys in all, 2 in the movable block and three in fixed block, such that effort is applied in the upward direction and a load of 60 kgf is attached to the movable block.

(a) What is the velocity ratio of pulley system ?
(b) Assuming pulley system an ideal one, what is the mechanical advantage ?
(c) What is the magnitude of effort applied ?
(d) If the pulley system is not ideal but is 75% efficient, what is the effort required ?

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 29
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 29.1

Practice Problems 3

Question 1.
A pulley system with velocity ratio 4 is used to lift a load of 100 kgf through a vertical height of IS m. The effort required to do so is 40 kgf which is applied in the downward direction. Calculate :

(a) Distance through which effort is applied
(b) Work done by the effort
(c) Mechanical advantage of pulley system
(d) Efficiency of pulley system.
(e) Number of pulleys in the upper and lower block. [Take g = 10 N kg-1]

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 30

Question 2.
A pulley system with velocity ratio 3 is used to lift a load of 60 kgf through a height of 20 m. The force is applied in upward direction and its magnitude is 25 kgf. Calculate :

(a) Distance through which effort is applied
(b) Work done by the effort
(c) Mechanical advantage of pulley system
(d) Efficiency of pulley system
(e) Total number of pulleys in the fixed and movable block. [Take g = 10 N kg-1]

Answer:
V.R. = 3
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 31
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 31.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 32

Additional Questions

Question 1.
What do you understand by the term inclined plane ?
Answer:
Inclined plane : “An inclined planet is a sloping surface (like ramps or bridge over the railway tracks at a railway station) that behaves like a simple machine whose M.A. is always less than 1 ”?

Question 2.
Explain how does an inclined plane acts as a machine.
Answer:
Inclined plane acts as a machine since less effort is needed in lifting a load to a higher level by moving over an inclined plane as compared to that in lifting the load directly.

Question 3.
Inclined plane acts as a machine in daily life. Give four examples.
Answer:
Four examples of inclined plane acting as machine :

  1. Ramp
  2. Railway Bridge
  3. Stair case
  4. Mountainous foot path or roads.

All these act as machine as less effort is needed in lifting the load to higher level.

Question 4.
What is gradient of inclination ? Support your answer with an example.
Answer:
Gradient of inclination : “The ratio between the vertical distance moved by a body and the horizontal distance travelled along the inclined plane is called grade of inclination” or gradient of inclined plane.
e.g. If a body riser 10 m vertically when it moves along the inclined plane by 200 m or sin θ 10 / 200 = 1 / 20 = then inclination grade is said to be 1 in 20.
Higher is the magnitude of gradient the more difficult is the slope to climb and vice-versa.
While laying hill roads, the gradient is kept allow as possible.

Question 5.
What do you understand by the following terms ?

(a) gear
(b) driven wheel
(c) driving wheel.

Answer:

(a) Gear : “A gear is a wheel with teeth around its rim.” Or “Is a precise device to transfer the rotatory motion from one point to the other”.
(b) Driven wheel “A wheel which receives motion from driver wheel and is connected to the load and rotates in opposite direction to driver wheel.”
(c) Driving wheel : “A gear wheel which is closer to the source of power and effort is applied to this wheel is called driving wheel”.

Question 6.
When the rotations of a driven wheel is more than a driving wheel, does it increase speed or load capacity ?
Answer:
Yes, the speed of driven wheel increases when its rotation increases.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick (✓) the most appropriate option.

1. A hill road rises up by 0.50 m, when the horizontal distance covered along the inclined plane is 20 m. The gradient of hill road is :
(a) 40 : 1
(b) 1 : 40
(c) 1 : 4
(d) 4 : 1
Answer:
(b) 1 : 40

2. Which is not an example of an inclined plane ?
(a) A ramp
(b) A crowbar
(c) A hill road
(d) A stair case
Answer:
(b) A crowbar

3. The mechanical advantage of an inclined plane :
(a) increases with the increase in angle of inclination
(b) decrease with the increase in the angle of inclination
(c) is unaffected with the increase in the angle of inclination
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) decrease with the increase in the angle of inclination

4. The mechanical advantage of an inclined plane is always :
(a) less than 1
(b) more than 1
(c) equal to 1
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) more than 1

5. A gear system is used for :
(a) gain in speed
(b) gain in torque
(c) change in the direction of rotation
(d) all the above
Answer:
(d) all the above

6. The driving wheel and the driven wheel of a gear system has same number of teeth. The gear system :
(a) increases the speed
(b) increases the torque
(c) changes the direction of rotation
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(c) changes the direction of rotation

7. Velocity ratio (gear ratio) of a car gaining speed is :
(a) more than 1
(b) less than 1
(c) equal to one
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) more than 1

Practice Problems 1

Question 1.
An effort of 20 kgf is applied on a barrel of weight 320 kgf in order to roll it up an inclined plane, through a vertical height of 1.2 m. Calculate the length of the inclined plane.
Answer:
Effort E = 20 kgf
Load L = 320 kgf
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 35

Question 2.
The gradient of a hill road is 1: 80. Calculate the weight of the vehicle which is pushed up an inclined plane by an effort of 150 kgf.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 35.2

Question 3.
A car develops a force of 500 N and climbs up a vertical distance of 200 m. If the load due to the car is 12500 N, calculate the length of the road covered by the car.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 35.3

Practice Problems 2

Question 1.
A car of mass 1000 kg can be lifted vertically with the help of pulley system into an open truck whose chassis is 1.2 m above the ground or can be pushed up by placing a ramp of length 4.8 m.

  1. How much effort is required to lift the car directly upward?
  2. How much is (a) mechanical advantage of ramp (b) effort needed to push the car up the ramp ?
  3. If the actual effort needed to push the car up the ramp is 5000 N, what is the force of friction offered by the ramp?

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 36

Question 2.
An oil drum of weight 75 kgf can be placed in a truck directly or by pushing it up along a wooden plank 3 m long, such that height of the floor of truck is 0.80 m above the ground level.

  1. How much effort is required to life the oil drum directly upward?
  2. How much is (a) mechanical advantage of inclined plane made by the wooden plank (b) effort needed to push up oil drum ?
  3. If the actual effort needed to push up the oil drum along inclined is 350 N, what is the force of friction offered by the wooden plank ?

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 37

Practice Problems 3

Question 1.
In a gear system, the number of teeth in the driven wheel is 16 and in the driving wheel is 48. Calculate the number of rotations made by the driven wheel for 20 rotations of driving wheel.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 37.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 38

Question 2.
The radii of the driving wheel and the driven wheel are 7 cm and 0.35 cm respectively. If the driving wheel makes 80 rotations per minute, calculate the rate of rotation of the driven wheel.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 38.1

Practice Problems 4

Question 1.
A gear system has one wheel with 96 teeth and other wheel with a teeth. Find (a) gain in speed (b) gain in torque which can be obtained from this system. Also find the gear ratio in each case.
Answer:

(a) For gain in speed : the wheel with 96 teeth should be used as driving wheel and the wheel with 4 teeth should be used as driven wheel
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 38.2
(b) For gain in torque : Well with 4 teeth should be used as teeth should be used as driven wheel
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 38.3
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 39

Question 2.
A gear system has one wheel with 60 teeth and other wheel with 10 teeth. Calculate (a) gain in speed (b) gain in torque which can be obtained from this system. Also find the gear ratio in each case.
Answer:
(a) For gain in speed : The wheel with 60 teeth should be used at driving wheel and wheel with 10 teeth as driven wheel.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 39.1

(b) For gain torque : The wheel with 10 teeth should be used as driving wheel : gain in torque = 60/10 = 6
Gear ratio = 10 : 60 = 1 : 6 9s less than 1

Question 3.
Define an Inclined plane.
Answer:

  1. It states that energy can neither be created or destroyed. It can simply change form from one form into another such that the total energy of system remains constant.
  2. Electrical into sound energy,Chemical into electrical Energy.

Questions From ICSE Examination Papers

2001

Question 1.
You are required to design a machine which is a force multiplier. If the machine is a simple lever, what kind of lever will you use ? Support your answer by a simple diagram of the lever.
Answer:
Class II Lever are Force Multiplier because by applying Less Effort, A Large Load Is Lifted.
Example
Bar To Lift Load
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 40

Question 2.
Pliers and scissors are levers of the same order.

(a) Which amongst them has a mechanical advantage less than one ?
(b) State the usefulness of the lever named by you which has a mechanical advantage less than one.

Answer:

(a) Class I lever can have M.A. less than 1 i.e. dL > dE example scissor
(b) So that load arm (blades move longer over the cloth (or paper) when the handle (effort arm) are moved a little.

2002

Question 3.
A cook uses a ‘fire tong’ of length 35 cm to lift a piece of burning coal of mass 200 g. If he applies his effort at a distance of 7 cm from the fulcrum, what is the effort in SI unit ? [Take g = 10 m s-1]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 40.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 41

2003

Question 4.
(a) What is the relationship between mechanical advantage and the velocity ratio for

  1. An ideal machine
  2. A practical machine ?

Answer:
(i) Velocity Ratio = Mechanical advantage (MA)
For an Ideal machine, there is no loss of energy in any manner.
(ii) Velocity Ratio > Mechanical advantage (MA) as efficiency is less than one.
For a practical machine, output work is always less than input work as due to some loss of input energy against friction.

(b) Give two reasons why the efficiency of a single movable pulley system is less than 100%.
Answer:

  1. Its parts are less than frictionless.
  2. Its string is not perfectly elastic.
  3. Weight of movable pulley.

2004

Question 5.
(a) Scissors and shears are levers of the first order. However, the cutting edge of scissors used for cutting cloth is much longer than the cutting edge of shears used for cutting metals. Explain the difference.
Answer:
To increase the load arm the blades of scissor are longer so that blades move over longer when the effort arm is moved a little.
The effort arms of shears made longer as compared to blades so that it becomes force multiplier and helps in cutting the metal sheet.
(b) A person draws water from a well using a single fixed pulley. The mass of the bucket together with water is 30 kg. If the force applied by the person is 35-0 N, calculate the mechanical advantage of the pulley. [Take g = 10 ms-2]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 42

2005

Question 6.
Draw a labelled sketch of a class II lever. Give one example of such a lever.
Answer:
An inclined plane is a simple machine which acts as a force multiplier. It is based on the principle that the effective value of weight of a body is much less along an inclined plane than along the horizontal. It is used to carry heavy load with a small effort.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 42.3
Question 7.
The figure shows the combination of a movable pulley P1 with a fixed pulley P2 used for lifting up a load W.

(a) State the function of the fixed pulley P2
(b) If the free end of the string moves through a distance x, find the distance by which the load W is raised.
(c) Calculate the force to be applied at C to just raise the load W = 20 kgf, neglecting the weight of the pulley P1 and friction.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 43

Answer:
(a) The fixed pulley P2 only changes the direction of the force i.e. force can be applied downwards which is more convenient.
(b) The load will be raised by a distance x/2.
(c) Distance moved by load dL = x/2
Distance moved by the effort dE = x
Load (L) = 20 kgf
Effort = ?
Load × Load arm = effort × effort arm
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 43.1

2006

Question 8.
A uniform metre scale is kept in equilibrium when supported at the 60 cm mark and a mass M is suspended from the 90 cm mark. State with reason whether the weight of the scale is greater than, less than or equal to the weight of mass M.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 44
Answer:
Since the meter scale is uniform
∴ Its mass per unit length is same and its wt. W acts at 50 cm mark.
∴ W × (60 – 50) = M (90 – 60)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 44.1

Question 9.
Name the type of single pulley that can act as a force multiplier. Draw a labelled diagram of the above named pulley
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 44.2

Lever of class second acts as force multiplier.
Example bar to lift load

Question 10.
A pulley system has a velocity ratio of 4 and an efficiency 90%.”
Calculate :

(a) Mechanical advantage of the system.
(b) Effort required to raise a load of 300 N by the system.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 45

2007

Question 11.
Which class of levers has a mechanical advantage always greater than one ? What change can be brought about in this lever to increase its mechanical advantage ?
Answer:
Class II levers is always greater than 1 To increase M.A. of the lever, effort arm should be longer than
Load arm ∵ M.A. = Effort / Load arm

Question 12.
Write an expression to show the relationship between mechanical advantage, velocity ratio and efficiency for a simple machine.
Answer:
Expression of relation M.A, V.R and efficiency is M.A.
Efficiency η = M.A / V.R.

Question 13.
A block and tackle pulley system has a velocity ratio 3.

(a) Draw a labelled diagram of this system. In your diagram, indicate clearly the points of application and the directions of the load and effort.
(b) Why should the lower block of this pulley system be of negligible weight ?

Answer:
(a) Block and Tackle Pulley System has VR = 3 (odd)
∴ Number of pulleys = 3
2 in block and 1 in tackle.
The labelled diagram is as shown in the fig.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 46
MA = Total number of pulleys in the two blocks i.e., 3
(b) The weight of lower block should be negligible so that efficiency should be more.

2008

Question 14.
Copy the diagram of the forearm given below, indicate the positions of Load, Effort and Fulcrum.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 47
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 47.1

Question 15.
(a) Draw a labelled diagram of a block and tackle system of pulleys with two pulleys in each block. Indicate the directions Of the load, effort and tension in the string.

(b)
Write down the relation between the load and the effort of the pulley system.
Answer:
(a) A pulley system with two pulleys in each block.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 48

2009

Question 16.
(a) With reference to the terms mechanical advantage, velocity ratio and efficiency of a machine, name the term that will not change for a machine of a given design.
(b) Define the term stated by you in part (i).
Answer:
(a) The term is velocity ratio as M.A depends on load to be raise and effort applied keep on changing and Efficiency also changes due to friction between pulley and string and also pulley and axle.
(b) V.R. : “The ratio of velocity of effort to the velocity of load.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 49
V.R. is “the ratio of displacement of effort to displacement of laod.”

Question 17.
A pulley system comprises of two pulleys, one fixed and the other movable.
(a) Draw a labelled diagram of the arrangement and show clearly the directions of all the forces acting on it.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 49.1

(b) What change can be made in the movable pulley of this system to increase the mechanical advantage of the system ?
Answer:
To increase the mechanical advantage of the system : Weight of the pulley and the string should be made negligible (as less as possible)

2010

Question 18.

(a) Why is the mechanical advantage of a lever of the second order always greater the one ?
(b) Name the type of single pulley that has a mechanical advantage greater than one.

Answer:

(a) The mechanical advantage of second order levers is always more than 1 because the effort arm is always longer than the load arm.
(b) A single movable pulley has MA greater than 1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 50

Question 19.

(a) Write a relation expressing the mechanical advantage of a lever.
(b) Give two reasons as to why the efficiency of a single movable pulley system is always less than 100%.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 50.1

2011

Question 20.
(a) A man can open a nut by applying a force of 150 N by using a lever handle Of length 0.4 m. What should be the length of the handle if he is able to open it by applying a force of 60 N ?
(b) Name a machine which can be used to

  1. multiply force
  2. change the direction of force applied

(c) Diagram shows a lever in use.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 51

  1. To which class of lever does it belong ?
  2. If FA = 40 cm, AB = 60 cm, then find the mechanical advantage of the lever.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 51.1

Question 21.
(a) What is meant by an ideal machine ?
(b) Write a relationship between the mechanical advantage (M.A.) and velocity ratio (V.R.) of an ideal machine.
(c) A coolie carrying a load on his head and moving on a frictionless horizontal platform does no work. Explain the reason why.
Answer:
(a) In an ideal machine, the work output is equal to the
work input i.e., the efficiency of an ideal machine is 100%. There is no loss of energy in any manner in Ideal Machine.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 52

2012

Question 22.
State the class of levers and the relative positions of load (L), effort (E) and fulcrum (F) in each of the following cases.

(a) A bottle opener
(b) Sugar tongs.

Answer:
(a) In case of bottle opener the load (L) acts in the middle of metal crown, the fulcrum (F) at the edge of metal crown and effort (E) at the end of the handle. It is a lever of second order.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 52.1
(b) Sugar tongs is a lever of third order. The sugar cube at the ends of tongs acts as load (L), the effort (E) acts in the middle and fulcrum (F) acts at its end.

2013

Question 23.
(a) A type of single pulley is very often used as a machine even though it does not give any gain in mechanical advantage.

  1. Name the type of pulley used
  2. For what purpose is such a pulley used ?

Answer:

  1. Single fixed pulley.
  2. It helps in changing the direction of applying efforts.

(b) (i) In what way does an ‘Ideal machine’ differ from a ‘Practical machine’ ?
(ii) Can a simple machine act as a force multiplier and a speed multiplier at the same time?
Answer:
(i) An ideal machine is the one whose parts are frictionless as well as weightless, such that its mechanical advantage is equal to its velocity ratio.
A practical machine is the one whose parts are neither frictionless nor weightless. Furthermore, its mechanical advantage is always less than its velocity ratio.
(ii) No, it can be either speed multiplier or force multiplier.

(c) Which class of lever found in the human body is being used by a boy

  1. when he holds a load on the palm of his hand
  2. when he raises the weight of his body on his toes ?

Answer:

  1. Lever of third order.
  2. Lever of second order

Question 24.
A block and tackle system of pulley’s a velocity ratio 4.

(a) Draw a labelled diagram of the system indicating clearly the points of application and directions of a load and effort.
(b) What is the value of the mechanical advantage of the given pulley system if it is an ideal pulley system ?

Answer:
(a)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 54

(b) Mechanical advantage will be equal to the number of pulleys engaged in a given pulley system.

2014

Question 25.
(a) What is the principle of an ideal machine?
Answer:
An ideal machine is that in which there is no dissipation of energy in any manner. The work output is equal to the work input.
Principle of Ideal Machine :
Output energy = Input energy
Load × Load = Effort × Effort arm

(b)
Draw a diagram to show how a single pulley can be used so as to have its ideal M.A. = 2.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 54.1

(c) Derive a relationship between mechanical advantages, velocity ratio and efficiency of a machine.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 55

2015

Question 26.
(a) Draw a simplified diagram of a lemon crusher, indicting direction of load and effort.
Answer:
The diagram below shows a lemon crusher indicating the direction of effort (E) and load (L).
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 56
(b) A block and tackle system has V.R. = 5.

  1. Draw a neat labelled diagram of a system indicating the direction of its load and effort.
  2. Rohan exerts a pull of 150 kgf. What is the maximum load he can raise with this pulley system if its efficiency = 75%?

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 56.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 57

 

2016

Question 27.
(a) With reference to the terms Mechanical Advantage, Ve locity Ratio and efficiency of a machine, name and define the term that will not change for machine of a given design
(b) From the diagram given below, answer the question that follow :
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 57.1

  • What kind of pulleys are A and B ?
  • State the purpose of pulley B.
  • What effort has to be applied at C just raise the load L = 20 kgf ? (Neglect the weight of pulley A and friction)

(c) A pulley system has three pulleys. A load of 120 N is overcome by applying an effort of 50 N. Calculate the Mechanical Advantage and Efficiency of this system.
Answer:
(a) Velocity ratio.
It is the ratio of the velocity of effort to the velocity of load. V.R. = VE / VL Velocity ratio does not change.
(b) (i) The pulley A is a single movable pulley and B is a single fixed pulley.
(ii) Pulley B is a single fixed type pulley. It purpose is to change the direction of the effort applied on the string.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines 58

More Resources

Hope given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Machines are helpful to complete your science homework.

If you have any doubts, please comment below. APlusTopper try to provide online science tutoring for you.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electromagnetic Waves and Spectrum

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electromagnetic Waves and Spectrum

Exercise – 1

Question 1.
What is the range of wavelength of visible light?
Answer:
Range of wavelength of visible light: 4000 A° to 8000 A°.

Question 2.
What do you understand by the term colour ?
Answer:
Colour : “Is a sensation produced in the brain and is not some thing material.”
Or
“Is a sensation produced in the brain due to excitation of the retina, by an electromagnetic wave of some particular wave length.

Question 3.
(a) Define :

  1. monochromatic light,
  2. polychromatic light.

(b) Is white light polychromatic or monochromatic ? Explain your answer.
Answer:
(a) (i) Monochromatic light : “A light which consists of one colour (or one wave length) only is called monochromatic light)”
(ii) Polychromatic light : “A light which consists of a mixture of several colours (wave bands) is called polychromatic light”.
(b) White light is a polychromatic light and has all the seven wavebands present in it.

Question 4.
Define or explain the following terms :

  1. dispersion of light
  2. spectrum

Answer:
(i) Dispersion of light : “The phenomenon of splitting white light into its components (seven colours) when passed through a prisms is called dispersion.”
(ii) Spectrum : “The band of colours obtained on the screen when a polychromatic (white) light splits into seven colours is called spectrum.”

Question 5.
Draw a neat diagram for the dispersion of white light by a prism and label all the colours of the spectrum.
Answer:
Dispersion of white light by prism:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electromagnetic Waves and Spectrum 2

Question 6.
Is the spectrum obtained by an equilateral glass prism pure or impure ? Explain your answer.
Answer:
Spectrum obtained is impure as colours overlap each other.

Question 7.
Draw a diagram showing that white light can be dispersed and then recombined by using two similar equilateral prisms.
Answer:
Dispersion and recombination of white light:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electromagnetic Waves and Spectrum 2.1

Question 8.

(a) What is ultraviolet spectrum ? What is the range of its wavelength in A° ?
(b) State four important properties of ultraviolet rays.
(c) State four uses of ultraviolet rays.

Answer:
(a) Ultraviolet spectrum : “The region of spectrum which extends beyond the violet colour of visible spectrum is called ultraviolet spectrum.”
(b) Four properties of ultra violet :

  1. They are electromagnetic waves and are not effected by: Electric Or Magnetic fields.
  2. They obey the laws of refraction and reflection.
  3. They travel with velocity 3 × 105 km/sec
  4. “I’hey produce chemical effect in silver salts.

(c) Four uses of U.V. :

  1. U.V. arc used to detect adulteration in ghee because of its property of fluorescence.
  2. Used to sterilise surgical instruments and drinking water.
  3. U.v. absorbed by skin stimulates body to produce vitamin D, which is very good for growth of bones and teeth.
  4. U.V. are used to detect original diamonds from fake diamonds.

Question 9.

(a) What are infrared rays ? What is the range of wavelengths of infrared rays in A° ?
(b) State four important properties and four uses of infrared rays ?

Answer:
(a) Infrared rays : “The electromagnet radiations beyond redend of the visible spectrum are called infrared rays : Their range is 8000 A° to 107 A°.
(b) Four properties of infra red rays :

  1. l.R. rays are least scattered by fog, mist etc. as they have long wavelength.
  2. They can be detected by a thermopile or a thermometer with a blackend bulb, as they produce heating effect.
  3. They travel with vel. of light i.e. 3 × 108 ms-1
  4. They are electromagnetic wave and hence are not affected by electromagnetic fields.

Four uses of infra red rays :

  1. They are used to detect diseases in crops which are used to find any change in heat radiation pattern and help in early warning to save crops.
  2. Patients with swollen joints, muscles, etc. feel relieved when exposed to these radiations.
  3. These are used in night vision devices.
  4. They are used in surface to air missiles for tracking and destroying enemy planes.

Question 10.
Write the names of all the components of electromagnetic spectrum in the order of increasing frequency.
Answer:
Components of electromagnetic spectrum in order of increasing frequency :
Radio wave microwave infra-red visible ultra violet, X rays, Gama rays
→ 3 × 1o7 Hz  3 × 1011 HZ 7.5 × 1014 3.75 × 1014 – 3 × 1016 HZ 3 × 1019 HZ

Question 11.
What do you understand by the term “scattering of light”? Which colour of white light is scattered the least and why?
Answer:
Scattering : “When an incident light strikes a particle which has a diameter greater than the wavelength of incident light, then the incident light is absorbed by the particle and transmitted in all possible directions. This phenomenon is called scattering.”
Red colour of white light is scattered the least.

Question 12.
Explain the following :

(a) Why does the sun appear red during sunrise or sunset?
(b) Why does the sky appear blue on the earth, but black on the moon ?
(c) Why are orange or yellow lights used as fog lights in automobiles ?
(d) Why do the distant hills appear blue ?
(e) Why does the sky appear blue, instead of violet ?

Answer:
(a) Sun appears red during sun rise or sun set : Blue colour of short wave length scatters the most, while red light of long wave length scatters least (white-blue = red) red light reaches us and sun appears red
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electromagnetic Waves and Spectrum 5
(b) Sky appears blue on earth but black on moon : Light from sun has to travel longer distance to reach us. Short wave length blue colours scatters more than red colour. Light reaching our eye from all directions is scattered blue, hence sky appears blue. Where as there is no atmosphere on moon, no scattering of light takes place and it appears black on moon.
(c) Red colour of longer wave length scatters least by air molecules of atmosphere and red light can be seen from farthest distance (without getting weak) hence are used as fog lights in automobiles.
(d) Distant hills appear : Blue because of scattering of blue light by water vapours present in air.
(e) As light passes through atmosphere indigo and blue both scatter because size of particles of present in air goon increasing and sky appears blue because blue light reaches us from particles scattering blue colour which are nearest to the eye.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick ( ✓ ) the most appropriate option.

1. Visible light has electromagnetic waves between :

(a) 8000 A° to 6000 A°
(b) 8000 A to 1000 A°
(c) 8000 A° to 4000 A°
(d) 8000 A to 2000 A°

Answer:

(c) 8000 A° to 4000 A°

2. 1 Angstrom unit (A°) is equal to :

(a) 10-10 m
(b) 10-12 m
(c) 10-8 m
(d) 106 m

Answer:

(a) 10-10

3. The most visible colour of visible spectrum is :

(a) blue
(b) red
(c) green
(d) orange

Answer:

(b) red

4. The. band of seven colours formed, when white light passes through an equilateral prism is called :

(a) dispersion
(b) colour band
(c) spectrum
(d) none of these

Answer:

(c) spectrum

5. Violet, green, red and yellow are the four colours formed on a white screen when a polychromatic light is dispersed. The arrangement of colours in the decreasing order of wave lengths is :

(a) green, red, yellow and violet
(b) red, yellow, green and violet
(c) violet, green, yellow and red
(d) violet, green, red and yellow

Answer:

(b) red, yellow, green and violet

6. The angle of deviation is maximum for ……. when the dispersion of polychromatic light takes place

(a) red
(b) violet
(e) green
(d) blue

Answer:

(b)violet

7. Which is not a source of ultraviolet radiations ?

(a) Sun
(b) Arc lamp
(c) Electric heater
(d) Star

Answer:

(c) Electric heater

8. The electromagnetic radiation which are useful in night photography is:

(a) infrared rays
(b) ultraviolet rays
(e) visible light
(d) X-rays

Answer:

(a) infrared rays

9. The electromagnetic wave associated with high energy is:

(a) ultraviolet ray
(b) X-ray
(e) gamma ray
(d) infrared ray

Answer:

(c) gamma ray

10. During the Sunset the colour which scatters closest to the eye of observer is:

(a) yellow
(b) red
(c) blue
(d) violet

Answer:

(b) red

11. Infrared rays with very large wavelength are easily reflected by

(a) air
(b) glass
(c) carbon dioxide molecules
(d) both (b) and (c)

Answer:

(c) carbon dioxide molecules

12. X-rays are produced by

(a) oscillating circuits in special vacuum tubes
(b) excitation of outermost electronic shell of an atom
(c) excitation of inner electron of atom and is sudden annihilation of high energy free electrons.
(d) nucleus of an atom, by the destruction of high energy particle.

Answer:

(c) excitation of inner electron of atom and is sudden annihilation of high energy free electrons.

Questions from ICSE examination papers 2005

2005

Question 1.
Name any two electromagnetic waves which have a frequency higher than that of violet light. State one use of each.
Answer:
Two ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES are :

  1. X-rays Use : are used for medical purposes.
  2. Gamma-rays : Use : are used to cure cancer.

Question 2.
A glass slab is placed over a page on which the word vibgyor is printed wit!, each letter in its corresponding colour.

(a) Will the image of all the letters be in the same place ?
(b) If not, which letter will be raised to the maximum. Give a reason for your answer.

Answer:

(a) No, the image of all letters will not be at the same place.
(b) Letter V will be raised maximum. This is because the refractive index of a material depends inversely upon the wavelength of light. On the other hand the shift in the image depends directly on the refractive index. Since the refractive index of a material is maximum for violet light, therefore letter V which is written with violet colour is raised the maximum.

2006

Question 3.
Give one use each of the following electromagnetic radiations given below

(a) Microwaves
(b) Ultraviolet radiation,
(c) Infrared radiation.

Answer:
Uses of:

(a) microwaves _____ for cooking, In radar for communication.
(b) Ultraviolet radiation _____ for sterilising purposes.
(c) Infrared radiation _____ used in remote control of T.V. and as signals during war.

2007

Question 4.
Why are infrared radiations preferred over ordinary visible light for taking photographs in fog ?
Answer:
INFRARED RADIATIONS have very long wavelength, they do not easily get scattered in fog or smoke. Thus they can be used for taking infra-red photographs with suitable photographic plates and filters in foggy weather.

Question 5.
(a) A particular type of high energy invisible electromagnetic rays help us to study the structure of crystals. Name these rays and give another important use of these rays,
(b) How does the speed of light in glass change on increasing the wavelength of light ?
Answer:
(a) The high energy invisible electromagnetic rays used in the study of the structure of crystals are X-rays. These X-rays find a wide application in locating the presence of foreign bodies in the human body.
(b) The speed of the waves of higher wavelength is more i.e., the speed increase with wavelength.

2009

Question 6.

(a) Why is white light considered to be polychromatic in nature?
(b) Give the range of the wavelength of those electromagnetic waves which are visible to us.

Answer:

(a) White light is made up of 7 colours vibgyor. As all seen colours have same speed in vacuum/air, so it appears white. Polychromatic means – number of colours combined so white light is actually polychromatic in nature.
(b) Visible waves has wavelength range between 4000 A° – 8000 A° (where 1 A° = 10-10 m)

2010

Question 7.
Two parallel rays of Red and Violet travelling through air, meet the air-glass boundary as shown in the figure:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electromagnetic Waves and Spectrum 10

(a) Will their paths inside the glass be parallel ? Give a reason for your answer.
(b) Compare the speeds of the two rays inside the glass.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Electromagnetic Waves and Spectrum 10.1

The two refracted rays inside glass are not parallel . Because the refractive index of glass is less for Red light,
while it is more for violet light ( µr < µ), So RED ray is deviated less while the violet is deviated more i.e. angle of refraction r1 for red is more than angle of refraction r2 for violet ray.
(a) Since the refractive index of glass for violet colour is more. ( µr < µ) SO, in glass, the red light travel faster than violet light. The paths inside the glass will not be parallel.
(b) Velocity of red colours will be more than that of the violet colour.

2011

Question 8.
(a) Suggest one way, in each case, by which we can detect the presence of:

1. Infrared radiations.
2. Ultraviolet radiations.

(b) Give one use of Infrared radiations.
Answer:
(a) Way to detect :
1. Infrared radiations : It we move a thermometer with blackend bulb from violet to red end of a visible spectrum, there is a slight rise in temperature and if the bulb is moved in the region beyond red, there is sudden rise in temperature, this proves that the region beyond red is not visible and produces heating effect is Infrared region.
2. Ultraviolet radiations : When a silver chloride (Ag Cl) paper is placed in the region beyond violet, the paper first turns violet, then BROWN and finally black. This proves that there is a region beyond violet which is invisible and produces. Strong chemical effect in silver chloride is known as Ultraviolet regions.
(b) One use of infrared radiation : Used in remote control of t.v. and other gadgets.

2012

Question 9.

(a) What is meant by ‘Dispersion of light’ ?
(b) In the atmosphere which colour of light gets scattered the least ?

Answer:

(a) The phenomenon due to which white light splits into component colours on passing through a prism is called dispersion of light.
(b) Red colour scatters least in the atmosphere.

2013

Question 10.
Name the radiations :

(a) that are used for photography at night
(b) used for detection of fracture in bones.
(c) whose wavelength range is from 100 A to 4000 A (or 10 nm to 400 nm).

Answer:

(a) infrared radiation
(b) X-rays
(c) Ultraviolet radiation.

2014

Question 11.

(a) Name the prism required for obtaining a spectrum of Ultraviolet light.
(b) Name the radiations which can be detected by a thermopile.

Answer:

(a) Quartz prism.
(b) Infrared radiations can be detected by thermopile.

Question 12.
Why is red colour used as a sign of danger?
Answer:
Since the wavelength of red light is maximum in the visible light, the light of red colour is scattered least by the air molecules of the atmosphere and therefore it can reach to a longer distance.

2015

Question 13.

(a) Why does the Sun appear red at sunrise?
(b) Name the subjective property of light related to its wave-length.

Answer:

(a) The Sun appears red at sunrise because of the scattering of light by the atmospheric particles. During sunrise, the light from the Sun has to travel a longer distance through the atmosphere to reach the observer. During this, most of the shorter wave-lengths present in it are scattered away from our line of sight by the molecules of air and other fine particles in the atmosphere. So, the light reaching us directly from the rising Sun consists mainly of longer wavelength red colour due to which the Sun appears red.
(b) The subjective property of light related to its wavelength is frequency.

Question 14.

(a) Name the high energetic invisible electromagnetic waves which help in the study of the structure of crystals.
(b) State an additional use of the waves mentioned in part (a).

Answer:

(a) X-rays are used in the study of structure of crystals.
(b) X-rays are used in the detection of fracture in bones and teeth.

2016

Question 15.
What do you understand by the term “Scattering of light”? Which colour of white light is scattered least and why ?
Answer:
Scattering of light is the phenomenon due to which a particle having a diameter greater than the wavelength of light incident on it absorbs the light and then transmits it in all possible directions.
The red colour of the white light is scattered the least because scattering of light depends inversely upon the four power of wavelength. As red colour has the maximum wavelength in the visible region, therefore, it scattered the least.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy.

These Solutions are part of A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions. Here we have given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy.

Question 1.
(a) Define work.
(b) What are the conditions for doing work
(c) State the mathematical expression for work.
Answer:
(a) “When force is applied on the body and body moves (covers , some distance) in the direction of force, work is said to be done.”

Or

“Work is said to be done, when a force or its component causes a displacement in its own direction.”
(b)
(1) Force should be applied.
(2) Displacement of body should be there.
(3) Work = Force x displacement
W = F x S

Question 2.
In which case work is done and why ?
(a) A man pushing a wall.
(b) A girl climbing a stair case
(c) A boy swimming in a tank.
(d) A man standing at a place and holding a suitcase in hand.
(e) A lady cooking food.
(f) A porter carrying a load on his head walking along a level road.
(g) A porter carrying a load and climbing upstairs.
Answer:

(a) A man pushing a wall does no work as wall does not move from its place and there is no displacement of wall in the direction of force.
(b) A girl climbing a staircase does work as component of force is in the direction of displacement.
(c) A boy swimming in a tank is doing work as force is applied in a direction opposite to the direction of displacement.
(d) The man is not doing work as displacement is zero.
(e)  A lady cooking food is doing no work as displacement of lady is zero.
(f) A porter is doing no work as the direction of his displacement is at right angle (90°) and force of gravity is downward (vertically)
(g) Porter does work as component of force is in direction of displacement.

Question 3
A man climbs a slope and another walks the same distance on a level road. Who does more work and why ?
Answer:
The man who walk on a level road does no work as he is walking at right angle to the direction of gravitational force. Hence the man climbs a slope is doing more work.

Question 4.
(a) State the CGS and SI units of work.
(b) How is joule related to erg ?
Answer:
(a) CGS unit of work is erg or gcm2s2
S.I. unit of work is joule or kgm2s2
(b) 1 J = 107 ergs or 1 erg = 10-7 g

Question 5.
Define power. State two mathematical expressions for power.
Answer:
Work : “Rate of doing work is called power.”
Two mathematical expressions for power are :
\(\mathbf{P}=\frac{w}{t}\)
\(\mathrm{P}=\frac{\mathrm{F} \times \mathrm{S}}{t}=\mathrm{F} \times \frac{s}{t}=\mathrm{F} \times v\)

Question 6.
(a) State the absolute unit of power in SI system.
(b) What is horsepower ? What is its magnitude in SI unit ?
Answer:
(a) Absolute unit of power is watt.
(b) Horse power is unit of power used in engineering 1 H.P = 746 w .

Question 7.
(a) What is energy ? State and define SI unit of energy.
(b) Define potential energy. Give two examples of potential energy.
(c) Define kinetic energy. Give four examples of kinetic energy.
Answer:
(a) Energy : “Capacity of doing work”
S.I. unit of energy is Joule
(b)Potential energy: “Energy posserred by a body by virtue of it position or configuration is called potential energy.”
Example :

  1. A key to works on P.E. when we wind the key its shape changes and on unwinding this energy is used by to do work.
  2. A stone kept at a height, when drop can break a plate of glass because of P.E. possessed by it

(c) Kinetic energy: “Energy possessed by a body by virtue of its motion.”

Examples :

  1. A bullet though of very small mass but moving with high speed and hence kinetic energy can peneterate a body.
  2. Running water of the river due its kinetic energy can rotate a turbine to produce electricity.
  3. A trunk running at high speed possesses kinetic energy and when hits a body can damage it.
  4. A shooting arrow possesses kinetic energy.
  5. Blowing wind possesses K.E.

Question 8.
What kind of energy is possessed by a body in the following cases ?
(a) A cocked-up spring and an air gun.
(b) A shooting arrow.
(c) A stone lying on the top of a housi.
(d) Water stored in the dam.
(e) An electron spining around the nucleus.
(f) A fish moving in water.
Answer:

(a) Potential energy, (stretched spring)
(b) Kinetic energy as arrow is in motion
(c) A stone lying on the top of a house has potential energy due to its position above the ground level.
(d) Water stored in dam has potential energy.
(e) An electron spining around the nucleus has kinetic energy.
(f) A fish moving in water has kinetic energy.

Question 9.
(a) State the law of conservation of energy.
(b) Prove mathematically the law of conservation of energy.
(c) Explain how a freely swinging pendulum obeys the law of conservation of energy.
(d) Name six kinds of energy familiar to you.
Answer:
(a) Law of conservation of energy : “Energy can neither be created nor destroyed.
Though it can be transformed from one form to other.”
(b) Mathematical proof of law of conservation of energy :
At A Consider a body of mass m at A at a height h above the ground level.
P.E. = mgh K.E. = 0 at rest.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 1

P.E. + K.E. = mgh + O = mgh     …………….. (i)
Let it fall from A to B covering a distance x and still at (h-x) above ground.
In doing so
v2 – u2 = 2 gx
v2 – 0 = 2gx
v2 = 2gx          …(a)
At B P.E = mg (h – x)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 2
AT C P.E + K.E = 0 + mgh
P.E. + K.E. = mgh
Thus we find sum of P.E. + K.E. at A, B, C remains same mgh
Hence varifies the law of can servation of energy.
(c) Energy changes at B K.E. = O
at highest pt. vel. = O
P.E. = mgh
∴ the bob is at height h

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 3
K.E. + P.E. = O + mgh = mgh            …(i)
At A: As the bob moves towards A from B its height goes on decreasing and h at A is zero, but its vol. goes on increasing.
∴ At A, P.E. = 0 and K.E. = mgh
∴ P.E. + K.E. = 0 + mgh = mgh    ….(ii)
At C : As the bob continues to move forward from B to C, its
velocity = 0 but height increases to h
∴ At C K.E. = 0 and P.E. = mgh
∴ K.E..+ P.E. = 0 + mgh
= mgh  …(iii)
Thus we find that sum total of K.E. and P.E remains constant which is in accordance with conservation of energy.
(d) Six kinds of energy :

  1. E. (wind energy)
  2. Heat energy
  3. Sound energy
  4. Solar energy
  5. Electrical energy
  6. Nuclear energy

Question 10.
State the energy changes taking place in the following cases:

(a) Glowing of a torch bulb
(b) A toy car is wound and then allowed to move on the floor
(c) A truck climbing up a hill
(d) Water in a dam rotates a turbine coupled to a generator
(e) An air gun is loaded and then fired
(f) A piece of magnesium burns in air
(g) Water freezes in the freezing chamber of a fridge
(h) A stone dropped from a cliff
(i) Food eaten by humans
(j) Exposure of photographic film in sunlight

Answer:

(a) Electric energy into heat light energy.
(b) Potential energy into mechanical energy or kinetic energy.
(c) Heat energy into mechanical (P.E.) energy
(d) E. of water into electrical energy.
(e) Potential energy of spring into K.E. of bullet (pallel)
(f) Chemical energy into heat energy.
(g) Electrical energy into mechanical energy (to run compresor)
(h) Chemical energy into heat energy.
(i) Potential energy into kinetic energy.
(j) Light energy of Sun into chemical energy.

Question 11.
Give one example in each case

(a) when heat energy changes into kinetic energy.
(b) when kinetic energy changes into heat energy.
(c) when sound energy changes into electric energy.
(d) when electric energy changes into sound energy.
(e) when light energy changes into chemical energy.
(f) when chemical energy changes into light energy.
(g) when electric changes into magnetic energy.
(h) when magnetic energy changes into electric energy.
(i) when potential energy changes into electric energy.
(j) when electric energy changes into potential energy.

Answer:

(a) In steam engine heat energy moves the wheels of engine and changes into kinetic energy.
(b) When we rub the palms of our hands fast they become warm hence K.E changes into heat energy.
(c) Sound energy of microphone changes into electrical energy.
(d) Electrical energy changes into sound energy while flowing through the speaker.
(e) Exposure of photographic film in Sun light.

Or

 During photosynthesis light energy changes into chemical energy.
(f) Burning of match stick by friction.
(g) The electrical energy in an electromagnet changes into magnetic energy.
(h) Motion of magnet in the coil i.e. in generaters.
(i) When water stored in dam rotates the turbine to produce electricity.
(j) During the pumping of water in an overhead tank by an electric motor pump, the electrical energy changes into kinetic energy of water. The kinetic energy of water then changes into potential energy.

Question 12.
Define kilowatt hour and convert it into joules
Answer:
Kilowatt hour : “When an electric power of one kilowatt flows through a conductor for one hour, then electrical energy which flows through the conductor is one kilowatt hour.”
1 KWH = 1000 W x 1h
1 KWH = 1000 W x (60 x 60) sec
= 1000 J/S x 3600 s
= 100000J
1 KWH = 105 J

Question 13.
Define electron volt and express it in joule.
Answer:
Electron volt : “The electric work done when an electron moves through an electric field at a potential difference of 1 volt.”
1 electron volt (eV) = charge on 1 electron x 1 volt
= 1.6 x 10-19C x IV
= 1.6 x 10-19 J             [∵ 1C x IV = 1J)
1 [eV] = 1.6 x 1019 J

Multiple Choice  Questions

Tick (✓ ) the most appropriate option.

1: A boy drags a load ‘L’ along horizontal plane AB by applying a force F. The boy does

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 4
(a) no work
(b) some positive work
(c.) negative work
(d) none of these

2. The SI unit of work is joule. It is expressed in terms of mass, length and time as
(a) kg m2s-3
(b) kg m2s-2
(c) kg2 m2s-2
(d) kg m2s-2

3. The SI unit of power is watt. It is expressed in terms of mass, length and time as:
(a) kg m2s-3
(b) kg ms-3
(c) kg2 m2s-2
(d) kg ms-2

4. A stone resting on the roof ofa building has
(a) potential energy
(b) gravitational energy
(c) kinetic energy
(d) none of these

5. A falling raindrop has :
(a) only kinetic energy
(b) only potential energy
(c) both kinetic and potential energy
(d) none of these

6. One horse power is equal to :
(a) 764 W
(b) 746 W
(c) 700 W
(d) 1000 W

7. One electron volt is equal to :
(a) 6 x 10-17 J
(b) 6.1 x 10-19 J
(c) 6 x 10-19
(d) 1.6 x 10-10 J

8. Kilowatt hour is the commercial unit of:
(a) electric power
(b) electric energy
(c) electric force
(d) none of these

9. Power is the product of:
(a) force and velocity
(b) force and displacement
(c) force and acceleration
(d) force and time

10. An aeroplane is flying at an altitude of 10,000 m at a speed of 300 km/hour. The aeroplane at this height has :
(a) only kinetic energy
(b) only potential energy
(c) both kinetic and potential energy
(d) zero kinetic and potential energy

11. Kilocalorie is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of:
(a) one gram of water through 1°C
(b) 1 kg of water through 100°
(c)  one kg of water through 1°C
(d) 1 kg of water through 10°C Arts.

12. When a flash light is switched on the electric energy
(a) directly changes to light energy
(b) first changes to light energy and then to heat energy
(c) first changes to heat energy and then to light energy
(d) none of above

13. A pendulum is swinging freely. The bob ofpendulum has:
(a) maximum K.E. at its extreme positions
(b) minimum K.E. at its mean position
(c) maximum K.E. at its mean position
(d) both (b) and (c)

14. A pendulum is oscillating freely. Its bob has :
(a) only kinetic energy
(b) maximum kinetic energy at extreme position
(c) maximum potential energy at its mean position
(d) a constant energy which is the sum of potential and kinetic energy

15. A ball of mass m is dropped from height ‘h ’.
(a) Potential energy of the ball at ground level is mgh.
(b) Potential energy of the ball at height h is mgh.
(c) kinetic energy of the ball at ground level is mgh
(d) both (b) and (c)

 Numerical Problems on Work, Power & Energy

Practice Problems 1

Question 1.
A girl of mass 50 kg climbs a flight of 100 stairs each measuring 0.25 m in height, in 20s. Find
(a) force acting on the girl
(b) work done by the girl
(c) gain in potential energy
(d) power in (1) watts (2) Horse
[Taking g = 10 ms-2, 1 HP = 750 W]
Answer:
mass = 50 kg g = 10 ms-1
(a) Force acting on the girl F = mg
F = 50 x 10 = 500 N
(b) Work done by girl W = F x S
W = 500 x 25 = 12500 J
(c) Gain in pot. energy = mgh
50 x 10 x 25 = 12500 J

Or

Gain in P.E. = Workdone = 12500 J

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 5

Question 2.
A load of 220 kg is vertically pulled up by a crane through a vertical height of 16 m in 40 s. Calculate
(1) Force acting in the upward direction
(2) Total work done
(3) Horse power of the engine pulling the rope [Take g = 9.8 ms-2 ; 1 HP = 750 w]
Answer:
Mass m = 220 kg  g = 9.8 ms-2 h= 16 m t = 40 s
(1) Force F = mg
= 220 x 9.8 = 2156 N

(2) Total work done = W = F x S
W = 2156 x 16 = 3496 J

(3) \(Horse power of engine \frac{3496}{40} \mathrm{J}=87.4 \mathrm{w}\)
\(=\frac{3496}{40 \times 750}=1.15 \mathrm{HP}\)

Practice Problems 2

Question 1.
A work of 1000 J is done on a body in 4 s, such that a displacement of 20 m is caused. Calculate
(a) force (b) power
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 7

Question 2.
What force must be applied to a body through a distance of 10 m, such that it does a work of 4000 J. If the mass of the body is 20 kg, what is the acceleration of the body ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 8

Question 3.
An engine of power 200 W, operates for 4 s. Find the work done by the engine. If the force developed by the engine is 100 N calculate the maximum displacement caused.
Answer:
p = 200 W t = 4 s
workdone = p x t
200 x 4 = 800 J
\(\text { displacement }=\frac{w}{\mathrm{F}}=\frac{800 \mathrm{J}}{100 \mathrm{N}}=8 \mathrm{m}\)

Practice Problems 3

Question 1.
Calculate the horse power of the motor of an elevator, which can carry 10 persons of average mass 60 kg
through a vertical height of 20 m in 30 s. [Take g = 10 N/ kg]
Answer:
Total mass of 10 persons = 60 x 10 = 600 kg
F = mg = 600 x 10 = 6000 N
displacement = h = 20 m    t = 30 s
work done = w = F x h = 6000 x 20 J
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 9

Question 2.
Calculate the power of an electric pump in horse power, which can lift 2000 m3 of water from a depth of 20 m in 25 minutes. [Take g = 10 ms 2 and 1 ml of water = 103 kg]
Answer:
1 m3 of water = 103 kg
∴ 2000 m3 of water has mass = m = 20 00 x 103 kg
wt. = force = mg = 2000 x 1o3 x 10N
Displacement = depth = 20 m
work done = F x S     t = 25 min = (25 x 60) S
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 10

Question 3.
Calculate the height through which a crane can lift a load of 4 t, when its motor of 4 HP operates for 10 s.[Take g = 10 ms-2]
Answer:
h = 2                  t= 10 s
mass = m = At = 4 x 1000 = 4000 kg
force F = mg = 4000 x 10 N
work done = F x h
= 4000 x 10 h
Power = 4HP = 4 x 750 w
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 11

Question 4.
For how long must an electric motor pump of2 HP operate, so as to pump 5 m3 of water from a depth of 15 m.[Take g = 10 N/kg, 1 m3 of water = 103 kg]
Answer:
t = ?
power = 2HP = 2 x 750w
p x t = work done
2 x 750x; = (mass x g) x displacement
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 12

Practice Problems 4

Question 1.
An electric pump is 60% efficient and is rated 2 HP. Calculate the maximum amount of water it can lift through a height of 5 m in 40 s. [Take g = 10 ms-2 and 1 HP = 750 W]
Answer:
Power of lift pump = 2 HP
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 13
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 14

Question 2.

Calculate the time for which a motor pump of 10 HP and efficiency 80% must be switched on, so as to pump 20 m3 of water through a vertical height of 20 m.[Density of water = 1000 kg m3; g = 10 ms-2; 1 HP = 750 W]
Answer:
Power of motor pump =10 HP
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 15

Question 3.
In a hydroelectric power station, 1000 kg of water is allowed to drop a height of 100 in in ¡ s. If the conversion of potential energy to electric energy is 60%, calculate the power output.
[Take g = 10 ms-2]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 16

Practice Problems 5

Question 1.
A compressed spring is held near a small toy car of mass 0.15 kg. On the release of the spring, the toy car moves forward with a velocity of 10 ms’. Find the potential energy of the spring.
Answer:
mass of car m = 0.15 kg
velocity y = 10 ms-1

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 17

Question 2.
A catapult throws a stone of mass 0.10 kg with a velocity of 30 ms-1. If 25% of the RE. of the elastic band is wasted during transmission, find the magnitude of the potential energy.
Answer:
Let pot. energy = RE.
P.E. wasted = 25%
P.E. used 100—25 = 75%

Practice Problems 6

Question 1.
A body of mass 20 kg is moving with a velocity of 1 ms-1 Another body B of mass 1 kg is moving wills a velocity of 20 ms-1. Find the ratio of kinetic energy of A and B.
Answer:

Question 2.
A bullet of mass 0.2 kg, moving with a velocity of 200 ms-1 , strikes a stationary wooden target of mass 5 kg. If all the energy is transferred to the wooden target, calculate the velocity with which the target towards direction.
Answer:
Let the other body (B) moves with kinetic energy of bullet = K.E. of wooden target (B)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 20

Practice Problems 7

Question 1.
A body of mass m has a velocity v. If the mass of the body increases 81 times, but the kinetic energy remains same, calculate the new velocity.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 21
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 22
Question 2.
A body P has KE energy E. Another body Q, whose mass is 9 times than P, also has kinetic energy E. Calculate the ratio of velocities of P and Q.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 23

Practice Problems 8

Question 1.
(a) Force of gravity acting on the barrel. (Take g — 10 ms-2)
(b) Work done by the force in pulling body along the inclined plane
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 24
(c) Work done against the force of gravity.
Answer:
(a) Force of gravity F mg
F = 2.5 x 10 = 25
(b) Work done in pulling the body along the inclined plane = F x displacement
= 40x 7.5 J
W = 300 J
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 25
(c) Work done against force of gravity
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 26

Question 2.
Adjacent diagram shows a body of mass 5 kg pulled up an inclined plane by a
force of 30 N.
(a) Calculate forced by gravity acting on body. (Take g = 10 ms-2)
(b) Work done by the force in pulling body along the inclined plane.
(c) Work done against the force of gravity.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 27
Answer:
Mass of body = 5 kg
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 28
(a) Force of gravity acting on the body
F = mg
F = 5 x 10 = 50 N
(b) Work done by force in pulling the body along the inclined plane = F x displacement
W = 30 N x 5 m
= 150 J
(c) Work done against force of gravity
= (mg) x BC
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 29

Practice Problems 9

Question 1.
A scooter develops a power of 1 HP while running at 36 km hr-1. Calculate the force generated by its engine.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 30

Question 2.
The engine of a car develops a power of 5 HP and force 500 N while running a uniform speed S. Calculate the value of S.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 31

Practice Problems 10.

Question 1.
The heart of a normal person beats 72 times in a minute and does a work of 1 joule per beat. What is power of the heart ?
Answer:
Work done per beat = 1 J
work done for 72 beats = 72 J
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 32

Question 2.
The heart of a deer chased by a tiger beats 200 times in a minute and does a work of 1.4 joules per beat. What is the power of heart ?
Answer:
Heart beats per minute = 200
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 33

Practice Problems 11

Question 1.
A beam of electrons has an energy of 1 joule. How many electrons are in the beam ? [1 eV = 1.6 x 10-19]
Answer:
Let there are n electrons in beam
Energy of n electrons in beam = 1 J
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 34

Question 2.
An accelerated electron has energy of 9.6 x 10-18 J. Express the energy in electron volts (eV)
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 35

Practice Problems 12

Question 1.
Calculate the kinetic energy of a body of mass 100 g and having a momentum of 20 kg ms-1.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 36
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 37

Question 2.
Calculate the kinetic energy of a body of mass 5 kg momentum 50 kg ms-1
Answer:
Mass m = 5 kg
move (Questions from ICSE Examination Papers) (Questions from ICSE Examination Papers) mentum p = mv = 50 kg ms-1

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 38

Practice Problems 13

Question 1.
A spring is kept compressed by a toy car of mass 100 g. On releasing the pressure the car moves out with a speed of 0.5 ms-1. Calculate the potential energy of the compressed spring.
Answer:
Kinetic energy = P.E.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 39

Question 2.
A lead pallet of mass 10 g leaves an air gun with a velocity of 40 ms-1 . What is the magnitude of potential energy stored by its spring?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 40

Questions from ICSE Examination Papers 


2002
Question 1.
(a) A machine raises a load of 800 N through a height of 15 m in 5 s. Calculate the power at which the machine works.
(b) State the principle of conservation of energy.
Answer:
(a) Load = mg = 800 N
displacement h = 15 m, t = 5s   P = ?
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 41
(b)  Conservation of energy: “Energy can neither be created nor destroyed.”

Question 2.
(a) State SI unit of the momentum of a body.
(b) Define : (1) work (2) Power (3) Energy.
(c) How is work related to applied force ?
(d) By what factor does the kinetic energy of a moving body change, when its speed is reduced to one third of the initial velocity ?
(e) What does the unit kilowatt hour measure ?
(f) From the ground floor, a man comes up to the third floor of a building using a staircase. Another person comes up to the mine floor, using an elevator. Neglecting friction, compare the work done in two cases.
Answer:
(a) S.I. unit of momentum is kgms-1
(b)

  1. Work: “If force is applied on a body and body moves in the direction of force. Work is said to be done.”
  2. Power: “Rate of doing work is called power.
  3. Energy: “Capacity of doing work is called energy.”

(c) W α p
or W α F cos 0
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 42
(e) Kilowatt hour measures Electrical energy consumed.
(f) Displacement in both cases is from ground floor to third floor work done in each case is same
i.e. 1 : 1

Question 3.
(a) The weights of two bodies are 2.0 N and 2.0 kgf respectively. What is the mass of each body ?
(g = 10 ms-2) .
(b) If the power of a motor is 40 kW, at what speed can it raise a load of 20,000 N ?
Answer:
(a) Weight = mg = 2N
m x 10 = 2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 43

2003
Question 4.
(a) The weights of two bodies A and B are 5.0 N and 5.0 kgf respectively. What is the mass of each body ?(g = 10 ms)
(b) If the power of a motor is 50 kW, at which speed can it raise a load of 25,000 N ?
Answer:
(a) wt. of body A = 5.0N
mg= 5
m x 10 = 5
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 44
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 45
2004
Question 5.
(a) What energy changes take place in an oscillating pendulum ?
(b) Two objects A and B have masses in the ratio of 2:1 and are dropped from the same height.
Answer the following questions :

  1. What is the ratio of velocities of A and B, when they strike the ground ?
  2. What is the ratio offorces of A and B, when they strike the ground ?

Answer:
(a)  At A
P.E. is max and K.E. is zero
As bob moves towards B, P.E. goes on decreasing K.E. goes on increasing
P.E. = zero              K.E.max
As the bob moves to C
K.E. goes on decreasing and P.E. goes on increasing
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 46
At C
P.E. is maximum and K.E. is zero
(b) (1) Mass of body B = m Mass of body A = 2m
They are dropped from the same height using
v2 – u2 = 2gh
v2 = 2gh is independent of mass and hence mass if not taken into account
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 47

Question 6.
A ball of mass 0.5 kg is thrown vertically upward with a velocity of 8 m/s. Calculate the maximum potential energy it gains at the highest point.
Answer:
v2 – u2 = 2gh
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 48

2005
Question 7.
(a) Which physical quantity does the electron volt measure? How is it related to SI unit of this quantity ?
(b) What would be the angle between force and displacement to get the (1) minimum work, (2) maximum work ?
(c)The work done by the heart is 1 J per Calculate the power of the heart, if it beats 72 times a minute.
(d) State the law of conservation of energy.
(e) Name the chief energy transformations that occur :

  1. in a loud speaker,
  2. in an electric ell.

Answer:
(a) Energy (electrical)
Relation with S.I. unit 1 ev = 1.6 x 10-19 J
(b) To get minimum work = 90°
To get maximum work = 0°
(c) See practice problem 10 Q. 1. page 56
(d) Law of conservation of energy :
“Energy can neither be created nor destroyed”
(e)

  1. Sound energy of man changes into electrical energy changes in microphones and electrical energy changes into sound energy, while flowing through the speaker.
  2.  Chemical energy changes into electrical energy.

2006

Question 8.
State the amount of work done by an object, when it moves in a circular path.
Answer:
Amount of work done when an object is moving in circular path is zero because the force acting and the displacement are at right angle.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 49

Question 9.
Show that for the free fall of a body, the sum of mechanical energy at any point in its path is constant. Answer:
See Q. 9(b) Ex. 1

Question 10.
Define newton, in SI unit of force. State its relationship with CGS unit of force.
Answer:

  1.  One newton is that force which when acting on a body of m ass 1 kg, produces an acceleration of
    1 m s-2 in it.
  2. S.I. unit of force is newton (N) and C.G.S. unit is dyne.
    IN = 105 dyne.11.

Question 11.
Calculate the height through which a body of mass 0.5 kg should be lifted, if the energy spent for doing so is 1.0 joule. [g = 10 m/s2]2
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 50

2007

Question 12.
Two bodies, A and B, of equal mass are kept at heights 20 m and 30 m respectively. Calculate the ratio of their potential entergies.
Answer:
∵ mass of body A = mass of body B = m
∴ P.E. of A : P.E. of body B
mgh, : mgh2
h1          :        h2
20        :         30
2          :         3

Question 13.
(a) Define kilowatt hour. How is it related to joule ?
(b) How can the work done be measured when force is applied at an angle to the direction of displacement ?
Answer:
(a) Kilowatt hour
kwH
1000 w x (60 x 60) s
1000 j/s x 3600 s
= 36 x 100000 J
1 KwH = 36 x 105 J
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 51

Question 14.
What is the main energy transformation that occurs during
(a) Photosynthesis in green leaves ;
(b) Charging of a battery ?
Answer:
(a) Energy changes during photosynthesis
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 52
(b) Charging of battery : Electrical energy supplied into chemical energy of battery than Chemical energy into electrical energy.

2008

Question 15.
(a) When an arrow is shot from a bow, it has kinetic energy in it. Explain briefly from where does it get its kinetic enrgy ?
(b) What energy conversions take place in the following when they are working (1) electric toaster (2) microphone ?
Answer:
(a) When an arrow is shot is gets its energy from the stretched bow/P.E. which in turn gets energy from the muscles of person stretching it.
i.e. P.E. of bow is transformed into K.E. of arrow.
(b)

  1. Electric energy is transformed into heat energy in a electric toaster.
  2. Sound energy of speaker is transformed into electric energy while flowing through a microphone.

Question 16.
(a) A stone of mass 64.0 g is thrown vertically upward from the ground with an initial speed of 20.0 m/s. The gravitational potential energy at the ground level is considered to be zero. Apply the principle of conservation of energy and calculate the potential energy at the maximum height attained by the stone, (g – 10 ms-2)
(b) Using the same principle, state what will be the total energy of the body at its half-way point ?
Answer:
When a stone is thrown vertically upward, work has to be done against gravity. At maximum height h. the work done = force x displacement
W = mg x h
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 53
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 54
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 55

Question 17.
Define ‘joule’, the SI unit of work and establish a relationship between the SI and CGS units of work.
Answer:
Joule :
“Is the work done when a force of 1 N displaces a body through 1 meter in the direction of force”.
Relation between S.I. and C.G.S. units
1J= 1 N x 1m
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 56

2009
Question 18(a).
What is the SI unit of energy ? How is the electron volt (eV) related to it ?
Answer:
Joule is SI unit of energy
Relation between eV and J
1 eV = charge on 1 electron x  1 V
1 eV = 1.6 x 10-19                  [∵ 1 Lx 1 V- 1 J]
J x 1V
1 eV = 1.6 x 10-19 J

Question 18(b).
State the energy changes that take place in the following when they are in use :
(1) a photovoltaic cell. (2) an electromagnet.
Answer:

  1. In photovoltaic cell, light energy is transformed into electrical energy.
  2. In an electromagnet, electrical energy is transformed into magnetic energy.

Question 18(c).
A body of mass 5 kg is moving with a velocity of 10ms-1. What will be the ratio of its initial kinetic energy and final kinetic energy, if the mass of the body is doubled and its velocity is halved ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 57

Question 19.
6.4 kJ of energy causes a displacement of 64 m in a body in the direction of force in 2.5 seconds. Calculate (1) the force applied (2) power in horse power (HP).(Take 1 HP = 746 W).
Answer:

  1. Energy = 6.4 kJ = 6.4 x 1000 J = 6400 J
    S = 64 m in the direction of force
    t = 2.5 sec F = ?
    P = ? (in HP)
    Energy = Work done = F x S in the direction of force
    ∴ F = Energy / S = 6400 / 64 = 100N
  2. A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 58
    Power in Hp =2560/746=3.43 Hp

Question 20.
An object of mass ‘m’ is allowed to fall freely from point A as shown in the figure. Calculate the total mechanical energy of the object at: (1) Point A (2) Point B (3) Point C (4) State the law which is verified by your calculations in parts (1), (2) and (3).
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 59
Answer:
(1)
At point A,
Mechanical energy means K.E. + P.E.
At height h above ground K.E. = 0 [ ∵ body is at real]
P.E. = mgh
KE + P.E. = 0 + mgh = mgh
Total mechanical energy = mgh …….(i)
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 60
K.E. mgh
K.E.+P.E.mgh+O=mgh
(4) The law which is verified in parts (I), (ii) and (iii) ¡s
conservation of energy i.e., total energy remains conserved.
It may change from one form to another.

2010

Question 21.
(a) A toy is acted upon by a force. State two conditions under which the work done could be zero.
Answer:
We know that W = FS cosθ. clearly, work done by the force will be zero if.

  1. ) S = 0 i.e., no displacement takes place
  2.  If θ = 90°, then cos 90° = 0, and W = 0;.e., when the force acts perpendicular to the direction of motion.

(b) A spring is kept compressed by a small trolley of mass 0.5 kg lying on a smooth horizontal surface as shown in the figure given below :
When the trolley is released, it is found to move at a speed of 2m s-1.
What potential energy did the spring possess when compressed?
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 61
Answer:
When spring is compressed, there is a potential energy stored in it. When the trolley is released the potential energy of spring is converted into kinetic energy of the trolley
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 73
Question 22.
A body of mass 50 kg has a momentum of 3000 kg ms-1. Calculate :

  1. the kinetic energy of the body.
  2. the velocity of the body.

Answer:
(1) Mass m = 50 kg
Momentum P = mv = 3000
mv = 3000
50(v)=3000
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 62

Question 23.
(a) A ball of mass 200 g falls a height of 5 m. What will be its kinetic energy when it just reaches the ground ? (g = 9.8 m s-2)
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 63

(b) What is energy degradation ?
Answer:
There is no degradation of energy as P.E. = mgh =
\(\left(\frac{200}{1000} \times 9.8 \times 5\right)=9.8 \mathrm{J}\) is transformed in K.E.=9.8J at ground

(c) Draw a diagram to show the energy changes in an oscillating simple pendulum. Indicate in your diagram the total mechanical energy in it remains constant during the oscillation.
Answer:
The variation of potential and kinetic energy is as shown. The total energy remains constant.

2012
Question 24(a).
(a) A ball is placed on a compressed spring. When the spring is released, the ball is observed to fly away.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 66

  1. What form of energy does the compressed spring possess?
  2. Why does the ball fly away ?

Answer:
(1) The compressed spring possesses potential energy.
(2) The potential energy of the spring on releasing changes to kinetic energy. It is the kinetic energy which makes the ball to fly away.

Question 24(b).
(1) State the energy conversion taking place in a solar cell.
(2) Give disadvantage of using a solar cell.
Answer:
(1) In a solar cell, the light energy directly changes to electric energy.
Disadvantage of using a solar cell
(2)

  1. Solar cell does not produce electric energy during night or in darkness.
  2. High cost
  3. Loss efficiency : A solar cell can convert only about 25% of the light.

Question 24(c).
A body of mass 0.2 kg falls from a height of 10 m to a height of 6 m above the ground level. Find the loss in potential energy taking place in the body, [g = 10 ms-2]
Answer:
Loss in potential energy = mass x g x loss of height
= 0.2 kg x 10 ms-2 x 4 m = 8 J

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 67

Question 24(d).
A moving body weighing 400 N possesses 500 J of kinetic energy. Calculate the velocity with which the body is moving, (g = 10 ms-2)
Answer:
Weight of the body = mg
m x 10 = 400
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 68

2013

Question 25(a).
(a) A force is applied on a body of mass 20 kg moving with a velocity of 40 ms-1. The body attains a velocity of 50ms-1 in 2 seconds. Calculate the work done by the body.
Answer:
m = 20 kg
u = 40 ms-1
v = 50 ms-1
t = 2s
a = ?
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 69

Question 25(b)
A girl of mass 35 kg climbs up from the first floor of a building at a height 4 m above the ground to the third floor at a height 12 m above the ground. What will be the increase in her gravitational potential energy ?(g = 10 ms-2).
Answer:
Mass of girl (m) = 35 kg
Height gained by girl (h) = (12 – 4) = 8 m
Increase in gravitational potential
energy = mgh = 35 (kg) x 10 ms-2 x 8 m
= 2800 J
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 70

Question 25(c).

  1.  State the Principle of conservation of energy.
  2. Name the form of energy which a body may possess even when it is not in motion.

Answer:

  1. Law of conservation of energy : Energy in a system cannot be created, nor be destroyed though, it can be transfered from one form to another.
  2. Potential energy.

2014
Question 26(a).

  1. When does a force do work?
  2. What is the work done by the moon when it revolves around the earth?

Answer:

  1. Work is said to be done only when the force applied on a body makes the body moves he., there is displacement of the body.
  2.  No work is done as moon revolves around the earth in Circular Path and angle between force acting towards the center of circle and tangent at any point in circular path is 90°.


Question 26(b)
 Calculate the change in the Kinetic energy of a moving body if its velocity is reduced to l/3rd of the initial velocity
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 71

Question 26(c)
State the energy changes in the following devices while in use:

  1. A loud speaker.
  2. A glowing electric bulb.

Answer:

  1. First sound energy is converted into electrical energy in microphone. Then electrical energy is converted into sound energy in loud speaker.
  2. Electrical energy converted to light and heat energy.

Question 26(d)
The conversion of part of the energy into an undesirable form is called Dissipation of energy

Question 27(a).
A man having a box on his head, climbs up a slope and another man having identical box walks the same distance on a leveled road. Who does more work against the force of gravity and why ?
Answer:
Man climbs up a slope does more work because the work done by the man walking on a leveled road is zero.

Question 27(b).
A body is thrown vertically upward. Its velocity keeps on decreasing. What happens to its kinetic energy as its velocity becomes zero ?
Answer:
The K.E. is transformed into potential energy where K.E. is 0 (at the highest point) or velocity becomes zero.

2015
Question 28(a).
How is work done by a force measured when the force:

  1. is in the direction of displacement?
  2. is in an angle to the direction of displacement?

Answer:

  1. When force is in the direction of displacement θ= 0°, then cos0 = 1.
    Hence, the work done by a force measured in the direction of displacement is
    W = F x S
    The work done is maximum and positive.
  2. When the displacement is in the direction making an angle . with the direction of force,
    Work done = Component of force in the direction of displace­ment x displacement
    W.F = cosθ x s

Question 28(b).
State the energy in the following while in use:   

  1. Burning of a candle.
  2. A steam engine.

Answer:

  1. Burning of a candle: Conversion of chemical energy to light and heat energy. When a candle bums, it gives light and heat.
  2. A steam engine : Conversion of heat energy into mechanical energy.In a steam engine, chemical energy of coal first changes to heat energy of steam, and then heat energy changes to mechanical energy.

Question 28(c).
(1) A scissor is a_________ multiplier
(2) 1 kWh =________ J.

Answer:

  • A scissor is a force multiplier because the effort applied is less than the load.
  • 1 kWh = 1 kilowatt x 1 hour
    = 1000 J s- x 3600 s = 3.6 x 106 J

Question 28(d).
Rajan exerts a force of 150 N in pulling a cart at a constant speed of 10 m/s. Calculate the power exerted.
Answer:
Given that
Force = 150 N
Velocity = 10 ms-1
Power = F x v = 150 N x 10 ms-1
= 1500 w

Question 29.
(a) Name the physical quantity measured in terms of horse power.
(b) A nut is opened by a wrench of length 20 cm. If the least force required is 2N, find the moment of force needed to loosen the nut.
(c) Explain briefly why the work done by a fielder when he takes a catch in a cricket match is negative.
Answer:
(a) Power is measured in horse power. 1 HP = 746 W
(b) According to the principle of moments, we have Moment of load about the fulcrum = Moment of effort about the ful­crum Load x Load arm = Effort x Effort arm
Given that the effort arm = 20 cm = 0.2 m, the minimum force E = 2 N
Therefore, the moment of load or the moment of force = 0.2 93 Work, Power and Energy x 2 = 0.4 NmThe moment of force needed to loosen the nut = 0.4 Nm
(c) The work done by a fielder when he takes a catch in a cricket match is negative because the force applied by the fielder is in the direction opposite to the displacement of the ball. The angle between the force applied and the displace­ment of the ball is 180° We know that work done = -F.s

2016.
Question 30.
A boy weighing 40 kgf climbs up a stair of 30 steps each 20 cm high 4 minutes and a girl weighing 30 kgf does the same in 3 minutes compare
(a) Work done by them
(b) Power developed by them
Answer:
Given:
Force of gravity of the boy, Fb = 40 kg x 10 Nkg1
= 400N
Time taken by him tb= 4 minutes = 4 x 60 s = 240 s
Force of gravity of the girl, Fg = 30 kgf x 10 Nkg-1
= 300 N
Time taken by her, tg = 3 minutes = 3 x 60 s=180 s
Distance covered by both in 30 steps is D = 30 x 20 = 600 cm = 6 m
While climbing, both have to do work against the force of gravity, 1
(1) Work done by the boy in climbing the stairs:
Wb = F x D = 400 N x 6 m
Wb = 2400 j
Work done by the girl in climbing the stairs:
Wb = F x D = 300 N x 6
Wg= 1800 J
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy 72

 

More Resources

Hope given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Work, Power And Energy are helpful to complete your science homework.

If you have any doubts, please comment below. APlusTopper try to provide online science tutoring for you.

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force

A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force

These Solutions are part of A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions. Here we have given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force

Exercise – 1

Question 1.
(a) Define the following :

  1. Rigid body
  2. point of action of force
  3. line of action of force
  4. principle of transmissibility of force.

(b) Name four bodies which can be called rigid bodies for practical purposes.
Answer:
(a)
(i) Rigid Body : “A body which does not get deformed under the action of a force or a number of forces is called rigid body,
(ii) Point Of Action Of Force : “The point on the rigid body where a force acts is called the point of action of force.”
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 4

(iii) Line Of Action Of Force : “An imaginary line passing through the point of action of force and drawn in the same direction in which the force acts is called line of action of force. LM is the line of action of force.
(iv) Principle Of Transmissibility Of Force : “It states that the point of action of force can be transmitted anywhere along the line of action of the force without causing any material difference in the movement of the body.”
(b) Wood, iron rod, stone and glass are rigid bodies.

Question 2.
Under what condition (s) a body describes a motion of :

(a) translation
(b) rotation.

Answer:
Conditions for

(a) Translational motion : Motion of rigid body in straight line and in the direction of applied force.
(b) Rotational motion : Rigid body should rotate about axis (or pivot).

Question 3.

(a) What do you understand by the term moment of force
(b) State two factors which determine the moment of force.

Answer:
(a) Moment of force : “The turning effect of force acting on a body about an axis is called the moment of force.”
(b) Factors affecting the moment of force :

  1. The magnitude of the force applied
  2. The distance of line of action of the force from the axis of rotation.

Question 4.
State one way of

(a) reducing moment of force
(b) Increasing moment of force for a given force acting on a body capable of turning around a fixed point.

Answer:

(a) Moment of force can be reduced by reducing the distance between force and the turning point.
(b) Moment of force can be increased by increasing the distance between force and the turning point.

Question 5.
State the law of moments.
Answer:
Law of moments : In equilibrium sum of anticlockwise moments is equal to sum of clock-wise moments.
Sum of anticlock wise moments = sum of clockwise moments.

Question 6.
(a) What do you understand by the terms (i) positive moments (ii) negative moments
(b) State the absolute units of moment of force in (i) CGS system (ii) S.I. system.
Answer:
(a)

  1. Positive moments : If the force produces anticlock wise motion in the rigid body about turning point, it is positive moment.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 6
  2. Negative moment : If the force produces clock wise motion in the body about turning point, it is negative moment.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 6.1

(b) Absolute units of moment of force in

  1. CGS system is dyne-cm.
  2. S.I system is newton-metre (N-m)

Question 7.
(a) What do you understand by the following terms ? (i) couple, (ii) arm of couple, (iii) moment of couple
(b) State the units of the moment of couple in (i) CGS system, (ii) S.I. system.
(c) Give four examples of couple in everyday life.
(d) State the mathematical expression for the moment of a couple.
Answer:
(a)

  1. Couple : “Two forces acting on a rigid body are equal in magnitude opposite parallel and not along the same straight line constitute a couple.”
  2. Arm of the couple : “Perpendicular distance between two forces is called arm of the couple.” i.e. AB is arm of couple.
  3. Moment of the couple : “Is the product of any one of the force and the arm of couple. i.e. F × AB is moment of couple.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 7

(b)

  1. In CGS system unit of moment of couple-dyne-cm
  2. In S.I. system unit of moment of couple-N-m.

(c) Examples of couple in everyday life :

  1. Steering wheel of a car.
  2. Turning of a screw driver.
  3. Opening and closing of water tap.
  4. Winding the watch.

(d) Mathematical expression : Moment of couple = force × Arm of couple.

Question 8.
Explain the following :

(a) Jack screw is provided with a long arm.
(b) It is easier to open a door by holding it from its edge.
(c) A small boy can balance a stout man on a see-saw.
(d) The handles of a hand flour grinder (chakki) is provided near its edge.
(e) It is easier to turn a steering wheel of larger diameter than a steering wheel of smaller diameter.
(f) A wrench or a spanner has a long handle.

Answer:

(a) So that there is maximum distance between force and turning point and minimum force is needed.
(b) Holding a door from edge increases the distance between force and turning point (hinge) and hence minimum force is needed.
(c) By making the smaller boy sit at longer distance from axis of rotation. Hence turning effect of force increases.
(d) To increase the distance between force and turning point and hence to apply minimum force.
(e) In this way we increase the ⊥ distance between force and point of rotation and minimum force is needed to rotate the steering.
(f) Moment of force increases by increasing the length of handle and minimum force is required.

Question 9.
The diagram along side shows a heavy roller, with its axle at O which is to be pulled on to the pavement XY by applying the minimum possible force. Draw the diagram and mark on it the point and direction in which the force should be applied?
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 8
Answer:
Force should be applied at A near the rim to increase the moment of force by increasing perpendicular distance OA (between force and point of rotation).
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 9

Question 10.
(a) What do you understand by the term equilibrium of a body?
(b) State the condition when the body is in (i) dynamic equilibrium (ii) static equilibrium support your answer with one example each.
(c) A body is acted upon by a number of forces acting in different directions. State two conditions for a body to be inequilibrium.
Answer:
(a) Equilibrium : “When two or more forces act on a rigid body such that the state of body (rest or of uniform motion) does not change, the body is said to be in equilibrium”.
(b) Condition when the body is in
(i) Dynamic equilibrium …. the body should remain in its state of uniform motion when it is under the action of forces.
Example : A train running with a constant speed is in dynamic equilibrium, because the force generated by its engine is equal to the force of friction due to rails and force of friction due to air.
(ii) Static equilibrium : The body should remain in state of rest when it is under the action of forces.
Example :
When a body is at rest on the ground the various forces are :
W = R and F = F
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 10
(c) When a body is acted upon by a number of forces the body is to be in equilibrium.
The two conditions are :
(i) The resultant of all the translational forces should be zero.
(ii) All the clockwise moments should be equal to all the anticlock wise moments.

Question 11.
(a) What do you understand by the term centre of gravity?
(b) State the position of CG in case of the following regular bodies.

  1. A triangular lamina
  2. a rectangular lamina
  3. a circular lamina
  4. a cylinder
  5. a sphere
  6. a square lamina.

Answer:
(a) Centre of gravity : “Is a point with in a body where the whole weight of body is supposed to act.”
(b) Position of C.G.

  1. A traingular lamina is the point of intersection of medians.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 10.1
  2. A rectangular lamina: is the point of intersection of its diagonals
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 11
  3. A circular lamina is its geometric centre O
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 11.1
  4. A cylinder is a point at the centre of its axis.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 11.2
  5. A sphere is its geometric centre.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 11.3
  6. A square is the point of intersection of its diagonals.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 11.4

Question 12.
(a) Is it possible to have a body whose centre of gravity is outside the body ? If so explain ?
(b) How will you determine the centre of gravity of an irregular piece of a cardboard ?
Answer:
(a) Yes, the body with L shape or a Boomrang has its centre of gravity out side the body.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 12
Medians AB, CD and EF meet at point O out side the body is C.G.
(b) To find C.G of irregular body with the help of plumb line. Make holes at A, B, C, D, E sharp corners and suspand the cardboad at each hole in turn with the help of thread of plumb line draw the line below the thread.
The centre of gravity is point where maximum number of lines meet.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 12.1

Question 13.
A flat triangular cardboard equilateral in shape is suspended by passing a common pin through a narrow hole at its one corner. Draw a diagram to show its position in the state of rest. In the diagram mark the position of suspension by the letter A and centre of mass (cenre of gravity) by the letter B.
Answer:
Point of suspension A and CG (B) is shown. B is the point where medians of ∆AX, DZ and CY intersect.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 13

Question 14.
A stone of mass ‘m’ is rotated in circular path with uniform speed by tying a strong string with the help of your hand. Answer the following questions.

(a) Is the stone moving with a uniform or variable speed ?
(b) Is the stone moving with a uniform acceleration ? What is the effect of acceleration ? In which direction does the acceleration act ?
(c) What kind of force acts on the stone and state its direction ?
(d) What kind offorce acts on the hand and state its direction?

Answer:

(a) Uniform speed.
(b) Yes, the stone is moving with uniform acceleration.
Effect of accelerated motion is it makes the body move in circular path. Acceleration acts at right angle to the radius of circle.
(c) Centripetal force acts on stone. Its direction is towards the centre of circle.
(d) Centrifugal force acts on hand. Its direction is opposite to the direction of centripetal force i.e. away from centre of circle along the radius.

Question 15.
State whether the following statements are true or false :

(a) on deformation of a body,Jhe position of its centre of gravity does not change.
(b) The centre of gravity of freely suspended body is always vertically below the point of suspension.

Answer:

(a) False
(b) True

Question 16.
Define or explain

(a) circular motion
(b) centripetal force
(c) centrifugal force

Answer:

(a) Circular Motion : “Motion of a body around a circular path with uniform speed, but variable velocity, such that it is acted upon by a uniform acceleration is called circular motion.”
(b) Centripetal Force : “A force which is directed towards the centre of a circular path and always acts at right angles to the direction of motion, along the circular path is called centripetal force.”
(c) Centrifugal Force : “The force acting on a body away from centre of its circular path is called Centrifugal Force.”

Question 17.
Give an example of a body moving with a uniform speed, but has an accelerated motion.
Answer:
Motion of moon around the earth is example of moon (with uniform speed and accelerated motion). Gravitational force of the earth provides necessary centripetal force.

Question 18.
Compare uniform circular motion and uniform linear motion.
Answer:
Uniform Circular motion :

  1. Speed of body is uniform.
  2. It is accelerated motion.
  3. Velocity of body is variable.
  4. External force is needed.

Uniform Linear motion :

  1. Speed is uniform.
  2. Acceleration is zero.
  3. Velocity is constant.
  4. No external force is needed.

Question 19.
Explain the motion of moon around the earth.
Answer:
The moon moves around the earth with uniform speed in a circular path. The centripetal force for its motion is provided by earth.

Question 20.
With reference to the magnitude of force and its direction, how does centripetal force differ from centrifugal force.
Answer:
Both centripetal force and centrifugal force have same magnitude but they are opposite in direction.

Multiple Choice Questions

Tick ( ✓ ) the most appropriate option

1. The point of action of force on a rigid body is :
(a) Fixed point on rigid body
(b) Fixed point but can be transferred any where along the line of action of force.
(c) Fixed point but can be transferred anywhere along the direction of force.
(d) Fixed point, but can be transferred anywhere opposite to the direction of force.
Answer:
(b) Fixed point but can be transferred any where along the line of action of force.

2. The turning effect produced in a rigid body around a fixed point by the application of force is called;
(a) turning force
(b) movement of force
(c) moment of couple
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) movement of force

3. The unit of moment of force in SI system is :
(a) Nm
(b) dynecm
(c) dynem
(d) Ncm
Answer:
(a) Nm

4. The moment of couple is mathematically the :
(a) product of one force and the perpendicular distance between two forces
(b) product of both forces and the perpendicular distance between them
(c) product of one force and tKe perpendicular distance between the point of application of force and turning point.
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) product of one force and the perpendicular distance between two forces

5. The condition for equilibrium is:
(a) the resultant of all the forces acting on the body be zero only.
(b) the resultant of moments of all the forces acting on the body about the turning point should be zero.
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) the resultant of moments of all the forces acting on the body about the turning point should be zero.

6. A body is acted upon by two unequal and opposite forces along different lines of action of force. The body will have
(a) only rotatory motion
(b) only translatory motion
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(a) only rotatory motion

7. A force F acts on a rigid body capable of turning around a fixed point. The moment of force depends upon
(a) magnitude of force F
(b) magnitude of perpendicular distance between the point of action of force and the turning point
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) both (a) and (b)

8. The centre of gravity of a cricket ball is at:
(a) its geometric centre
(b) at its bottom touching the ground
(c) its top most point
(d) at any point on its surface
Answer:
(a) its geometric centre

9. A body is describing a uniform cicular motion. Which of the following quantities is/are constant
(a) speed
(b) acceleration
(c) velocity
(d) both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(a) speed

10. In a uniform circular motion :
(a) speed of body continuously changes because the direction of motion changes
(b) velocity of body continuously changes because the direction of motion changes
(c) the motion of body is accelerated
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (b) and (c)

Numerical Problems on Moment of Force

Practice Problems 1

Question 1.
A force of 50 dynes acts on a rigid body, such that the perpendicular distance between the fulcrum and the point of application of force is 75 cm. Calculate the moment of force.
Answer:
Force F = 50 dynes
⊥ distance = 75 cm
∴ Moment of force = F × ⊥ distance
= 50 × 75 = 3750 dynecm

Question 2.
The perpendicular distance between the point of application of force and the turning point is 1.75 m, when a force of 80 N acts on a rigid body. Calculate the moment of force.
Answer:
⊥ distance = 1.75 m
Force F = 80 N
∴ Moment of force = F × ⊥ distance
= 80 × 1.75 = 140.00
= 140 Nm

Practice Problems 2

Question 1.
A force of 50 N produces a moment of force of 10 Nm in a rigid body. Calculate the perpendicular distance between the point of application of force and the turning point is 45 cm.
Answer:
F = 50 N
Moment of force =10 Nm
⊥ distance = ?
Moment of force = F × ⊥ dist.
10 = 50 × ⊥ distance.
∴ ⊥ distance 10/50 = 0.2 m

Question 2.
Calculate the force which will produce a moment offorce of 1575 dynecm, when the perpendicular distance between point of application of force and turning point is 45 cm.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 19

Practice Problems 3

Question 1.
A couple of 15 N force acts on a rigid body, such that the arm of couple is 85 cm. Calculate the moment of couple in S.I. system.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 19.1

Question 2.
Calculate the length of the arm of couple, if a force of 13 N produces a moment of couple of 14.3 Nm.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 20

Question 3.
Two forces each of magnitude 2N act vertically upward and downward respectively on two ends of a uniform rod of length lm, freely pivoted at its centre. Determine the resultant moment of forces about the mid-point of the rod.
Answer:
As the two equal forces 2N are acting at the ends of pivoted rod AB. These constitute a couple in anti-clockwise direction.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 20.1

Practice Problems 4

Question 1.
The diagram along side shows a force F = 5 N acting at point A produces a moment of force of 6 Nm about point O. What is the diameter of the wheel
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 20.2
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 20.3

Question 2.
The diagram alongside shows a force F acting at point A, such that it produces a moment of force of 20 Nm in clockwise direction. Calculate the magnitude of force F
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 20.4

Practice Problems 5

Question 1.
Study the diagram alongside and calculate the moment of couple.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 20.5
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 20.6

Question 2.
Two forces F1 and F2 are applied on a circular body such that moment of couple is 9 Nm in CWD. Calculate the radius of circular body.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 21
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 21.1

Question 3.
Two forces F1 = F2 are applied on a wheel of 1.5 m radius, such that moment of couple is 30 Nm. Calculate the magnitude of each of the force.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 21.2
Answer:
Anticlockwise direction
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 22
F1 = F2 = F in opp. direction and are parallel
Hence constitute a couple
moment of couple = F × diameter AB
30 = F
30 = F × (2 × 1.5)
F= 30/3 = IO N

Practice Problems 6

Question 1.
A uniform metre scale is balanced at 60 cm mark, when weights of 5 gf and 40 gf are suspended at 10 cm mark and 80 cm mark respectively. Calculate the weight of the metre scale.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 22.1
Let w be the mass of metre scale acting a mid point 50 cm
Clock wise moment = 40 × (80 – 60)
= 40 × 20 = 800 g f cm …….(i)
Anticlockwise moments
= 5 × (60 – 10) + w × (60 – 50)
(250 + 10 w) gf cm ……..(ii)
Anticlockwise moment = clock wise moment
250+ 10 w = 800
10 w= 800 -250 = 550
w = 550/10 = 55 gf

Question 2.
A uniform metre scale is balanced at 20 cm mark, when a weight of 100 gf is suspended from one end.Where must the weight be suspended ? Calculate the weight of the metre scale.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 23
Let w be the weight of metre scale.As the scale is balanced at 20 cm and 100 gf is suspended on one end (0 mark). The weight of longer arm i.e. BC is balanced by 100 gf
∴ CW moment = A.C.W moment
W × 30 = 20 × 100
W = 2000/30 = 66.66 gf
wt. of 100 gf should be suspended at zero mark.

Question 3.
A uniform metre scale balances horizontally on a knife edge placed at 55 cm mark, when a mass of 25 g is supported from one end. Draw the diagram of the arrangement. Calculate mass of the scale.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 23.1
As the metre scale is balanced at 55 cm mark i.e. large arm is balanced by arm BC and 25 g is suspended at one end i.e. at 100 cm mark
∴ Anticlockwise moment = clockwise moment
W × (55 – 50) = 25 × (100 – 55)
W = 25 × 45 / 5 = 225g

Practice Problems 7

Question 1.
A uniform metre scale of weight 50 gf is balanced at the 40 cm mark, when a weight of 100 gf is suspended at the 5 cm mark. Where must a weight of 80 gf be suspended to balance the metre scale ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 24
Let a wt. of 80 gf be placed at a distance x from 40 cm mark.
Clock wise moments = Anticlock wise moment
(80 × x) + 50 × (50 – 40) = 100 × (40 – 5)
80 x +500 = 3500
80 x = 3500 – 500 = 3000
x = 3000/80 = 37.5 cm
∴ A is at 40 + 37.5 = 77.5 cm mark

Question 2.
A see-saw 8 m long is balanced in the middle. Two children of mass 30 kgf and 40 kgf are sitting on the same side of the fulcrum at a distance of 1.5 m and 3.5 from the fulcrum respectively. Where must a lady weighing 60 kgf sit from the fulcrum, so as to balance the see-saw ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 24.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 25

Question 3.
A uniform wooden beam AB, 80 cm long and weighing 250 gf, is supported on a wedge as shown in the figure. Calculate the greatest weight which can be placed on end A without causing the beam to tilt.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 25.1
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 25.2

Question 4.
Figure shows a uniform metre rule weighing 100 gf, pivoted at its centre ‘O’. Two weights of 150 gf and 250 gf hang from the metre rule as shown. Calculate :

(a) Total C.W. moment about ‘O’.
(b) TotalA.C.W. moment about ‘O’.
(c) Differentiate of C.W. andA.C.W. moments.
(d) The distance from ‘O’ where a 100 gf weight should be suspended to balance the metre scale.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 26

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 26.1

Question From ICSE Examination Papers

2011

Question 1.
(a) Where does the position of centre of gravity lie for

  1. a circular lamina ?
  2. a triangular lamina ?

Answer:

  1. Its centre of Gravity lies at its Geometrical Centre
  2. The point of intersection of diagonals.

(b) A uniform metre scale canbe balanced at 70.0 cm mark, when a mass of 0.05 kg is hung from 94.0 cm mark.

  1. Draw the diagram of the arrangement.
  2. Find the mass of metre scale.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 27

2012

Question 2.
(a) A boy of mass 30 kg is sitting at a distance of 2 m from the middle of a see-saw. Where should a boy of mass 40 kg sit so as to balance the see-saw ?
(i) What is meant by the term ‘moment of force’ ?
(ii) If the moment of force is assigned a negative sign, then will the turning tendency of the force be clockwise or anitclockwise?
(c) (i) Which of the following remain constant in uniform circular motion : speed or velocity or both ?
(ii) Name the force required for uniform circular motion. State the direction
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 28

(b)

  1. Moment of force : “The turning effect of force acting on a body about on axis is called moment of force.”
  2. Clockwise is taken negative.

(c)

  1. Speed-remains constant.
  2. Centripetal force. It acts towards the centre of circular path at right angles to the direction of motion.

2013

Question 3.
(a)
(i) Where is the centre of gravity of a uniform ring situated.
(ii) ‘The position of centre of gravity of a body remains unchanged even when the body is deformed. ’State whether the statement is true or false.
(b) With reference to their direction, how does centripetal force differ from centrifugal force ?
Answer:
(a)
(i) At the centre of ring, (where there is no mass)
(ii) False.
(b) Both force have equal magnitude but in oppose direction.
i.e. contripetal force towards the centre of circular path but centrifugal force acts away from centre.

2014

Question 4.
(a) Is it possible to have an accelerated motion with a constant speed ? Explain.
Answer:
Yes, a body moving in circular path has accelerated motion with constant speed.
(b) Two forces each of 5 N act vertically upwards and downwards respectively on the two ends of a uniform metre rule which placed at its mid point as shown in the diagram. Determine the resultant moment of these forces about the mid-point
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 28.1
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 28.2

2015

Question 5.
(a) On whatfactor does the position of the centre of gravity of a body depend ?
(b) Name the factors affecting the turning effect of a body :
(c) (i) Define equilibrium.
(ii) In a beam balanced when the beam is balanced in a horizontal position, it is in _____ equilibrium.
(d) Explain the motion of a planet around the Sun in a circular path.
Answer:
(a) The whole weight of body should act at that point.
(b) Factors affecting the turning effect :

  1. force applied
  2. ⊥ distance between turning point and point of application of force.

(c)

  1. Equilibrium : “When two or more forces act on a rigid body such that the state of body (rest or of uniform motion) does not change, the body is said to be in equilibrium.
  2. Static

(d) A planet moves around the Sun in a circular path and the gravitational force of Sun acts on planet and provides necessary centripetal force.

2016

Question 6.
(a) A stone of mass ‘m’ is rotated in a circular path with a uniform speed by tying a strong string with the help of your hand. Answer the following questions :

  1. Is the stone moving with a uniform or variable speed ?
  2. Is the stone moving with a uniform acceleration ? In which direction does the acceleration act?
  3. What kind of force acts on the hand and state its direction?

Answer:

  1. The stone is moving with uniform speed as given in the question.
  2. Uniform acceleration. It acts at right angles to the direction of motion of stone.
  3. The force which acts on the hand is the Centripetal force. It is directed towards the hand along the string.

Additional Questions

Question 1.
Define force.
Answer:
Force : “Is an external agent which changes or tends to change the state of rest or of uniform motion of a body in straight line or bends or deforms a body.”
Or
Force : “Is the which produces or tries to produce a change in the state of rest or of uniform motion or shape of the body.”

Question 2.
What are contact forces ? Give four examples of contact forces.
Answer:
Contact forces : “The forces which act on another body through some connector are called contact forces.”
Or
“The forces which act on bodies when they are in actual contact.”
Examples :

  1. Force of friction
  2. Force of tension.
  3. A player can set a ball in motion by hitting it with his foot or by pushing it with a bat.
  4. Pulling a rubber bond to increase its length.

Question 3.
Among the forces of pull or push which can be applied only through (a) a rigid connect or (b) non-rigid connector. Give an example in support of your answer.
Answer:
(a) Pull and push both can be applied through a rigid connector.
e.g. we can pull a table with a rigid rod. We can also a table with a push rigid rol (connector).
(b) Non-rigid connector can not be applied to push a table i.e. a rope cannot push a table to move it from one place to other. Only pull can be applied through non-rigid connector.

Question 4.
What are forces at a distance ? Give three examples
Answer:
Forces at a distance : “A force which does not make a direct contact with a body, but acts through space is called force at a distance or A Non-Contact Force.”
Three examples :

  1. Gravitational force acting on a falling body.
  2. Electrostatic force between two charged particles.

Question 5.
Classify the following as contact and non-contact forces :

  1. A horse pulling a cart
  2. A magnet attracting a piece of iron.
  3. A freely falling stone.
  4. A boy shooting an arrow from a bow.
  5. Tides in the sea.
  6. A speeding car stops when an engine is switched off.
  7. Two negatively charged ball repelling each other.
  8. Crushing paper into paper ball.

Answer:

  1. A horse pulling a cart → Contact force.
  2. A magnet attracting a piece of iron → Non contact force.
  3. A freely falling body → Non-contact force.
  4. A boy shooting an arrow from a bow → Contact force.
  5. Tides in the sea → Non-contact force.
  6. A speeding car stops when an engine is switched off → Contact force.
  7. Two negatively charged ball repelling each other → Non-contact force.
  8. Crushing paper into paper ball → Contact force.

Question 6.
A brass ball is hanging from a stiff cotton thread. Draw a labelled diagram showing the forces acting on the brass ball and the cotton thread.
Answer:
Forces acting on the brass ball

  1. Weight w acting vertically downward.
  2. Tension T in the thread in upward direction.
    A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 32

Question 7.
A spring is attached to a hook in a wall and is pulled outward. Draw a labelled diagram showing the forces acting on the spring.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 32.1

When spring is pulled outward restoring force acts towards the wall.

Question 8.
State three characteristics of non-contact forces.
Answer:
Characteristics of non-contact forces :

  1. Non – contact forces can pass through any kind of medium. They can pass through vacuum.
  2. Gravitational force is always attractive in nature.
  3. Magnitude of non-contact forces on two bodies is inversely proportional to the square of distance between their centres.

Question 9.
The distance between two bodies is doubled. How is the magnitude of gravitational force between them affected?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 33
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 33.1

Question 10.
(a) What do you understand by “balanced forces” ?
(b) Draw a diagram for balanced forces. When a force is applied on a wooden block, such that it does not move.
(c) Name two pairs of forces which are numerically equal to each other in question.
Answer:
(a) Balanced force : “When a number of forces act on a body simultaneously such that their resultant is zero and hence, the body continues in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line, then the set of forces acting on the body are said to constitute balanced forces.”
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 33.2

Question 11.
(a) What do you understand by the term “unbalanced forces”.
(b) Draw a diagram showing various forces acting on a box which is pushed, such that it starts sliding.
(c) In question 11 (b) which pair of forces is (i) balanced (ii) unbalanced ?
Answer:
(a) Unbalanced forces : “The set of forces acting on a body simultaneously, such that their resultant force is not zero and the body does not continue in the state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line, the forces are called unbalanced forces.”
(b) fig.
(c)

  1. Balanced forces acting on box are R = W normal reaction equal to weight of box.
  2. Unbalanced forces are F’ < F i.e. pushing force (F) is greater than force of friction F’ and hence the box moves to the right in the direction of force.

Question 12.
State three effects which an unbalanced force can produce.
Answer:
Effects produced by unbalanced force :

  1. It produces motion in the body.
  2. It can stop a body in motion or it slows down it.
  3. It changes the direction of motion of body.

Question 13.
Name the type of force (balanced or unbalanced) which changes the shape of a rubber ball on compressing.
Answer:
It is unbalanced force
Compressing force F > F ‘
F ‘ is restoring force.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 34

Question 14.
Name the unbalanced force which

  1. allows a body to fall down from a height
  2. stops a moving car, when its engine is shut off.

Answer:

  1. Down ward force (mg) = weight of body is more that upthrust (upward force or resistance due to air).
  2. Force of friction due to ground and air on car is greater than the moving force acting on car.

Question 15.

  1. Name and define absolute units of force in C.GS. and S.I systems.
  2. Derive a relation between newton and dyne.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 35

Question 16.

  1. Name and define gravitational units of force in CGS and S.I. system.
  2. A force of 5 kgf acts on a body. Express the force in (a) gf (b) newtons (c) dynes [Take g = 10 ms-2]

Answer:
Gravitational unit of force in CGS system is gram force.
Gram force (gf) : “Is force which produces an acceleration due to gravity (980 cms-2) in a body of mass 1 gram”.
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 36

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which of the following is not contact force ?
(a) Frictional force
(b) Normal reaction
(c) Electrostatic force
(d) Force of compression in a spring.
Answer:
(c) Electrostatic force

2. Which of the following is not non-contact force
(a) Gravitational force
(b) Force of tension
(c) Electrostatic force
(d) Magnetic force
Answer:
(b) Force of tension

3. The mathematical expression for force is
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 36.1
Answer:
(d) all of these

4. 1 kgf is equal to :
(a) 1 kg × 9.8 ms-2
(b) 1 kg × 1ms-2
(c) 1 kg × 980 cms
(d) 1 kg × 98 ms-2
Answer:
(a) 1 kg × 9.8 ms-2

5. A wooden block is placed on a table top and then gently pulled such that it does not move. In this situation
(a) applied force on the block is equal to frictional force only.
(b) applied force on the block is equal to the weight of block only.
(c) weight of block is equal to the normal reaction only.
(d) both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (c)

6. A cricket ball rolling down the ground stops after travelling some distance. The balanced force acting on the ball is
(a) gravitational force
(b) frictional force of ground
(c) frictional force of air
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (b) and (c)

7. With the increases in distance between the centres of two masses, the gravitational force between them :
(a) increases
(b) decreases
(c) remains same
(d) depends upon the magnitude of mass.
Answer:
(b) decreases

8. A stone is projected vertically upward. As the stone rises up the gravitational force acting on it
(a) increases
(b) decreases
(c) remains same
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) decreases

Numerical Problems

Question 1.
How much acceleration will be produced in a body of mass 10 kg acted upon by a force of 2 kgf ? [g = 9.8 ms-2]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 38

Question 2.
The weight of a body on earth is 98 N where acceleration due to gravity is 9.8 ms-2. What will be its (i) mass and (ii) weight on the moon where acceleration due to gravity is 1.6 ms-2 ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 38.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 39

Question 3.
What force will produce on acceleration of 3.5 m/s2, in a body of mass 12.5 kg ?
Answer:
F = m × a
= 12.5 × 3.5 = 43.75 N

Question 4.
Calculate the mass of a body, when a force of 525 N, produces on acceleration of 3.5 m/s2.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 39.1

Question 5.
The engine of a truck of mass 4t, produces a force of 7500 N. Calculate the acceleration of the truck produced by the engine.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 39.2

Question 6.
A cyclist and a person on a moped are acted upon by the same force, If the acceleration produced by the cyclist is only 1/25 th that of the moped, calculate the ratio of the masses of the cyclist and the moped.
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 40

Question 7.
Two blocks of different metals, but identical in shape and size, are acted upon by equal forces, such that the acceleration of the second block is 3 times more than that of the first block. What is the ratio of the mass of the second block with respect to that of the first block ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 40.1

Question 8.
A force of 100 N gives a body of mass m}, an acceleration of 5 ms/s2. The same force can give an acceleration of 40 m/s2. The same force can give acceleration of 40 m/s2 to another body of mass m2 If both the bodies are tied together and acted upon by the same force as above what acceleration is produced in the combination ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 41

Question 9.
A force of 500 N acts on a body of mass x and gives it an acceleration of 200 m/s2. The same force acting on another body of mass y gives it an acceleration of 40 m/ s2. If x and y are tied together and the same force as above acts on them, what acceleration is produced in the combination ?
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 41.1
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 42

Question 10.
A vehicle is acted upon by a force of 120 kgf. If the mass of vehicle is 80 kg. What is the acceleration of the vehicle? [take g = 10 ms-2]
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 42.1

Question 11.
A force of 64 kgf produces an acceleration of 2 ms-2 in a body. What is the mass of the body ? (Take g = 10 ms-2)
Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 42.2

Question 12.
A hockey ball of mass 100 g is at rest. It is hit by a player, such that it leaves the hockey stick with a velocity of 40 ms-1. If the time of contact of hockey with the ball is 0.01s. Calculate

  1. the acceleration of the ball
  2. force acting on the ball.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 42.3
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 43

Question 13.
A car of mass 600 kg running at a constant speed of 30 ms-1 is brought to rest in 3 secs. Calculate

  1. acceleration of car
  2. force acting on the car.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 43.1

Question 14.
A stone is dropped from a height of 80 m on the surface of moon takes 10s. to reach to the ground level. If the mass of stone is 100 kg. Calculate

  1. acceleration due to gravity of moon
  2. force acting on the stone.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 43.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 44

Question 15.
A car starting from rest covers a distance of 200 m in 5 s with a uniform acc. If mass of car is 800 kg calculate

  1. Acceleration acting on car
  2. force developed by the engine of the car.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 44.1

Question 16.
A bullet of mass 50 g strikes a wooden log with a velocity of 200 ms-1 and is brought to rest in 0.1 s. Calculate

  1. retardation
  2. distance penetrated by bullet in the wood
  3. retarding force.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 44.2
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 45

Question 17.
A train of mass 200 t running at a constant speed of 20 ms-1 is brought to rest in 1 min and 40 s. Calculate :

  1. retardation
  2. distance covered by the train before stopping
  3. retarding force.

Answer:
A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force 45.1

More Resources

Hope given A New Approach to ICSE Physics Part 2 Class 10 Solutions Force are helpful to complete your science homework.

If you have any doubts, please comment below. APlusTopper try to provide online science tutoring for you.